+ All Categories
Home > Documents > Polymer MEMS

Polymer MEMS

Date post: 01-Dec-2014
Category:
Upload: adam-khan
View: 148 times
Download: 4 times
Share this document with a friend
Popular Tags:
296
POLYMER MICROELECTROMECHANICAL SYSTEMS: FABRICATION AND APPLICATIONS IN BIOLOGY AND BIOLOGICAL FORCE MEASUREMENTS DISSERTATION Presented in Partial Fulfillment of the Requirements for the Degree Doctor of Philosophy in the Graduate School of The Ohio State University By Nicholas J. Ferrell, B.S. ***** The Ohio State University 2008 Dissertation Committee: Approved by Professor Derek J. Hansford, Advisor Professor L. James Lee ___________________________________ Professor Allen Yi Advisor Biomedical Engineering Graduate Program
Transcript
Page 1: Polymer MEMS

POLYMER MICROELECTROMECHANICAL SYSTEMS: FABRICATION AND APPLICATIONS IN BIOLOGY

AND BIOLOGICAL FORCE MEASUREMENTS

DISSERTATION

Presented in Partial Fulfillment of the Requirements for

the Degree Doctor of Philosophy in the Graduate

School of The Ohio State University

By

Nicholas J. Ferrell, B.S.

*****

The Ohio State University 2008

Dissertation Committee: Approved by Professor Derek J. Hansford, Advisor

Professor L. James Lee ___________________________________

Professor Allen Yi Advisor Biomedical Engineering Graduate Program

Page 2: Polymer MEMS
Page 3: Polymer MEMS

ABSTRACT

Polymer materials are increasingly being utilized in biomedical micro- and

nanotechnolgy applications. This trend has been driven by a several factors ranging from

materials compatibility to cost. The manufacturing techniques used to produce these

devices are considerably less mature than their silicon-based counterparts. New

manufacturing techniques are needed to address unique processing challenges posed by

polymer materials. To this end, we have developed a set of soft lithography based

micromolding techniques for fabrication of polymer microstructures and devices from a

wide range of materials. Materials include common thermoplastic polymers such as

poly(methyl methacrylate) (PMMA) and polystyrene as well as functional materials such

as conducting polymers. The processing techniques developed through this work are

capable of producing a wide range of structures including continuous microstructured

films, isolated polymer microstructures, and suspended structures. The nature of the

materials and the non-cleanroom based micromolding processes makes these techniques

considerably more cost effective with respect to both materials and processing costs.

In addition to developing processing techniques, characterization of the processes

as well as the materials is a critical step for implementation of polymers in practical

device applications. Process characterization was performed by systematically varying

process parameters and evaluating the resulting microstructures using common micro-

ii

Page 4: Polymer MEMS

and nanoscale characterization techniques. Scanning electron microscopy, atomic force

microscopy, and optical microscopy were all used to evaluate the resulting polymer

structures. Nanoindentation techniques were used to characterize the mechanical

properties of the materials. Elastic modulus, hardness, creep, scratch resistance, and yield

strength of several polymer MEMS materials were evaluated.

Application of these techniques for development of functional devices is

ultimately the goal. We have used the processing techniques that we have developed to

fabricate and test three polymer MEMS devices for biological applications. The first is a

microfabricated membrane system for isolation of individual cells or cell clusters. This

device could be utilized in a variety of cell biology applications including single cell

experimentation, cell cluster biology, and tissue engineering. The other two devices were

developed for measuring low magnitude biological forces. A polymer cantilever force

sensor was developed for measuring contractile forces produced by fibroblast cells. This

device could be used in cell mechanobiology studies, drug evaluation, and cell-based

biosensing. The final device is an adapted polymer cantilever sensor for measuring forces

produced by protein aggregates known a forisomes. This unique biomaterial could be

utilized as a valve or actuator in microdevices.

iii

Page 5: Polymer MEMS

Dedicated to my parents

iv

Page 6: Polymer MEMS

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

I would like to thank my advisor, Derek Hansford, for his support and

encouragement dating all the way back to my undergraduate days. I thank Dr. Hansford

for his advice and mentorship. Working under his guidance over the years has been a

pleasure.

I thank all the members of our research group, past and present. Their support,

training, mentoring, and patients were indispensable. Specifically, I would like to

acknowledge Jay Woodard for his painstaking work with the design and simulation of the

cell force sensor. Special thanks to Jingjiao Guan, Joe Kitzmiller, Rob Short, Kelly

Larkin, and Jason Sakamoto for showing me the ropes and getting me started on my way

down this path. I am grateful to have had the opportunity to work closely with Yang Sun

and Randy Butler. I especially thank Daniel Gallego and Natalia Higuita for their

enthusiasm and constant willingness to help me out in the lab.

I am grateful to Profs. L. James Lee and Allen Yi for serving on my committee. I

would like to thank the technical staff and the Nanotech West Laboratory, particularly

Derek Ditmer and Paul Steffan, for technical support and training.

This research was supported in part by the Air Force Office of Scientific Research

MURI award (F49620-03-1-0421). Portions of this work were funded by the National

Science Foundation (NSF) Center for Affordable Nanoengineering of Polymer

v

Page 7: Polymer MEMS

Biomedical Devices (EEC-0425626). I also acknowledge the NSF Integrative Graduate

Research and Education Traineeship (IGERT) program (0221678) for my graduate

fellowship.

vi

Page 8: Polymer MEMS

VITA

September 27, 1979.……………………..Born - Van Wert, OH

2003….…………………………………..B.S. Mechanical Engineering, The Ohio State University

2003-present...…….…………….……….Graduate Research Fellow, The Ohio State University

2007….…………………………………..Visiting Research Scientist, Instituto de Enginharia Biomédica (INEB), Universidade do Porto

PUBLICATIONS

Research Publications

1. Nicholas Ferrell, James Woodard, Derek Hansford, “Fabrication of Polymer Microstructures for MEMS: Sacrificial Layer Micromolding and Patterned Substrate Micromolding.” Biomedical Microdevices, 9, 815-821 (2007).

2. Jingjiao Guan, Nicholas Ferrell, Bo Yu, Derek J. Hansford, L. James Lee, “Simultaneous Fabrication of Hybrid Arrays of Nanowires and Micro/Nanoparticles by Dewetting on Micropillars.” Soft Matter, 3, 1369-1371 (2007).

3. Manuel Palacio, Bharat Bhushan, Nicholas Ferrell, Derek Hansford, “Adhesion Properties of Polymer/Silicon Interfaced for Biological Micro-/nanoelectromechanical Systems Applications.” Journal of Vacuum Science and Technology A, 25, 1275-1284 (2007).

4. Nicholas Ferrell, Derek Hansford, “Fabrication of Polymer Micro and Nanostructures by Soft Lithography and Spin Dewetting.” Macromolecular Rapid Communications, 28, 966-971 (2007).

5. Manuel Palacio, Bharat Bhushan, Nicholas Ferrell, Derek Hansford, “Nanomechanical Characterization of Polymer Beam Structures for BioMEMS Applications.” Sensors and Actuators A: Physical, 135, 637-650 (2007).

vii

Page 9: Polymer MEMS

6. Randall T. Butler, Nicholas J. Ferrell, Derek J. Hansford, “Spatial and Geometrical Control of Biosilification Using a Patterned Poly-L-Lysine Template.” Applied Surface Science, 252, 7337-7342 (2006).

7. Jingjiao Guan, Nicholas Ferrell, L. James Lee, Derek J. Hansford, “Fabrication of Polymeric Microparticles for Drug Delivery by Soft Lithography.” Biomaterials, 27, 4034-4041 (2006).

8. Guohua Wei, Bharat Bhushan, Nicholas Ferrell, Derek Hansford, “Fabrication and Nanomechanical Characterization of Polymer MEMS for Biological Applications.” Journal of Vacuum Science and Technology A, 23, 811-819 (2005).

9. Jennifer Lewis, Mark Kotur, Omar Butt, Sumant Kulkarni, Alyssa Riley, Nick Ferrell, Kathryn Sullivan, Mauro Ferrari, “Biotechnology Apprenticeship for Secondary-level Students: Teaching Advanced Cell Culture Techniques for Research.” Cell Biology Education, 1, 26-42 (2002).

FIELD OF STUDY

Major Field: Biomedical Engineering

viii

Page 10: Polymer MEMS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Page

Abstract…………………………………………………………………………………… ii Dedication………………………………………………………………………………... iv Acknowledgments…………………………………………………………………………v Vita……………………………………………………………………………………….vii List of Tables ………………………………………………………………………...….xiii List of Figures ...…………………………………………………………………………xiv Chapters Page

1. Microfabrication and Microelectromechanical Systems (MEMS) ................................. 1

1.1 Introduction............................................................................................................... 1 1.2 Microfabrication and MEMS.................................................................................... 2

1.2.1 Photolithography................................................................................................ 2 1.2.2 Silicon MEMS fabrication ................................................................................. 6 1.2.3 Applications of silicon MEMS ........................................................................ 10 1.2.4 Silicon-based BioMEMS ................................................................................. 10 1.2.5 Microfluidics.................................................................................................... 14 1.2.6 Polymer microfabrication ................................................................................ 17 1.2.7 Applications of polymer MEMS...................................................................... 21

1.3 Conclusion .............................................................................................................. 24

2. Cell Mechanics.............................................................................................................. 31

2.1 Introduction............................................................................................................. 31 2.2 Cell mechanics and cell forces................................................................................ 32

2.2.1 The cytoskeleton .............................................................................................. 32 2.2.2 Forces generated by adherent cells .................................................................. 34 2.2.3 The cytoskeleton and disease........................................................................... 37 2.2.4 Drugs and cell mechanics ................................................................................ 38

2.3 Measuring cell mechanics....................................................................................... 39 2.3.1 Appling forces to cells ..................................................................................... 39 2.3.2 Measuring the mechanical properties of cells.................................................. 40 2.3.3 Measuring forces generated by cells................................................................ 41 2.3.4 BioMEMS for measuring cell forces ............................................................... 43

ix

Page 11: Polymer MEMS

2.4 Conclusion .............................................................................................................. 46

3. Fabrication of Polymer Microstructures by Double Stamp Micromolding .................. 51

3.1 Introduction............................................................................................................. 51 3.2 Materials and Methods............................................................................................ 53

3.2.1 Double stamp micromolding process............................................................... 53 3.2.2 Process characterization................................................................................... 54

3.3 Results and discussion ............................................................................................ 55 3.4 Conclusion .............................................................................................................. 60

4. Spin Dewetting of Polymers on Polydimethylsiloxane (PDMS) Molds ..................... 62

4.1 Introduction............................................................................................................. 62 4.2 Materials and methods ............................................................................................ 65

4.2.1 Materials .......................................................................................................... 65 4.2.2 PDMS molding ................................................................................................ 65 4.2.3 Spin dewetting and pattern transfer ................................................................. 65 4.2.4 Process characterization................................................................................... 68

4.3 Results and discussion ............................................................................................ 68 4.4 Conclusion .............................................................................................................. 75

5. Lift-Off Processing for Fabricating Micropatterned Sulfonated Polyaniline ............... 78

5.1 Introduction............................................................................................................. 78 5.2 Materials and methods ............................................................................................ 80

5.2.1 SPAN synthesis................................................................................................ 80 5.2.2 Micromolding and Lift-off processing............................................................. 80 5.2.3 Process characterization................................................................................... 82

5.3 Results and discussion ............................................................................................ 83 5.4 Conclusion .............................................................................................................. 87

6. Microfabricated Membranes for Cell Isolation............................................................. 90

6.1 Introduction............................................................................................................. 90 6.2 Materials and methods ............................................................................................ 93

6.2.1 Materials .......................................................................................................... 93 6.2.2 Membrane fabrication...................................................................................... 93 6.2.3 Cell culture and filtration ................................................................................. 95 6.2.4 Characterization ............................................................................................... 97

6.3 Results and discussion ............................................................................................ 97 6.4 Conclusion ............................................................................................................ 104

7. Fabrication of Suspended Polymer Microstructures by Patterned Susbstrate Micromolding and Sacrificial Layer Micromolding....................................................... 107

7.1 Introduction........................................................................................................... 107 x

Page 12: Polymer MEMS

7.2 Materials and methods .......................................................................................... 109 7.2.1 PDMS mold fabrication ................................................................................. 109 7.2.2 Sacrificial layer micromolding ...................................................................... 110 7.2.3 Patterned substrate micromolding.................................................................. 113

7.3 Results and discussion .......................................................................................... 115 7.4 Conclusion ............................................................................................................ 120

8. Measuring the Mechanical Properties of Polymer Microstructures by Nanoindentation......................................................................................................................................... 123

8.1 Introduction........................................................................................................... 123 8.2 Materials and methods .......................................................................................... 128

8.2.1 Fabrication of polymer microstructures and thin films.................................. 128 8.2.2 Mechanical characterization .......................................................................... 129

8.3 Results and discussion .......................................................................................... 134 8.3.1 Hardness and elastic modulus by CSM nanoindentaion................................ 134 8.3.2 Creep behavior by CSM nanoindenation....................................................... 135 8.3.3 Scratch resistance from nanindentation scratch test ...................................... 136 8.3.3 Elastic modulus from normal beam bending ................................................. 138 8.3.4 Effects of aqueous environment and temperature.......................................... 141 8.3.5 Yield and breaking strength from normal beam bending .............................. 143 8.3.6 Lateral beam bending..................................................................................... 145

8.4 Conclusion ............................................................................................................ 146

9. Desing, Simulation, and Fabrication of a Polymer Sensor for Measuring Single Cell Forces.............................................................................................................................. 149

9.1 Introduction........................................................................................................... 149 9.2 Materials and methods .......................................................................................... 151

9.2.1 Solid modeling for device visualization ........................................................ 151 9.2.2 Finite element analysis................................................................................... 151 9.2.3 Device development and prototyping process ............................................... 151 9.2.4 Device fabrication.......................................................................................... 152 9.2.5 Device characterization.................................................................................. 154

9.3 Results and discussion .......................................................................................... 154 9.3.1 Design considerations .................................................................................... 154 9.3.2 Device overview ............................................................................................ 155 9.3.3 First generation cell force sensor ................................................................... 157 9.3.4 Second generation cell force sensor............................................................... 162 9.3.5 Third generation cell force sensor.................................................................. 170 9.3.6 Determining the force vectors from displacement data ................................. 177

9.4 Conclusion ............................................................................................................ 181

Biological Testing of the Polymer MEMS Cell Force Sensor........................................ 183

10.1 Introduction......................................................................................................... 183

xi

Page 13: Polymer MEMS

10.2 Materials and method.......................................................................................... 185 10.2.1 Sample preparation and surface modification.............................................. 185 10.2.2 Experimental setup....................................................................................... 186 10.2.3 Cell culture techniques................................................................................. 188 10.2.4 Cell placement ............................................................................................. 188 10.2.5 Image acquisition and analysis .................................................................... 189

10.3 Results and discussion ........................................................................................ 190 10.3.1 Sample preparation ...................................................................................... 190 10.3.2 Experimental results with first and second generation devices ................... 192 10.3.3 Results with third generation sensors .......................................................... 195 10.3.4 Effects of chemical exposure on cell forces ................................................ 205 10.3.5 Sources of error and measures to minimize error ........................................ 207

10.4 Conclusion .......................................................................................................... 209

11. Measurement of Mechanical Forces Generated by Plant P-Protein Aggregates (Forisomes) ..................................................................................................................... 212

11.1 Introduction......................................................................................................... 212 11.2 Materials and methods ........................................................................................ 213

11.2.1 Design .......................................................................................................... 213 11.2.2 Finite element simulations ........................................................................... 214 11.2.3 Fabrication and Characterization ................................................................. 214 11.2.4 Forisome preparation ................................................................................... 215 11.2.5 Experimental setup....................................................................................... 216

10.3 Results and discussion ........................................................................................ 216 11.4 Conclusion .......................................................................................................... 222

Conclusion and Future Outlook ...................................................................................... 224

Appendices

A. Design and Simulation Data for the Cell Force Sensor ............................................ 228

B. Polymer Microfabrication as a Tool for Processing Inorganic Materials .................. 239

List of References ........................................................................................................... 258

xii

Page 14: Polymer MEMS

LIST OF TABLES

Table Page

1.1 Typical etch processes for silicon based materials………...……………………...9

8.1 Mechanical properties of PPMA, PMMA, PS, and PS/Clay ……………...……140

10.1 Cell force calculations for second generation cell force sensor. ………………..194

10.2 Cell force calculations for second generation cell force sensor. ………………..195

A.1 Equations for calculating force angle……………………………………...….. 234

A.2 Equations for calculating deflection per unit force………………...…….……..237

A.3 Spreadsheet for calculating force vectors from displacement data……………..238

xiii

Page 15: Polymer MEMS

LIST OF FIGURES

Figures Page

Figure 1.1 Schematic diagram of the photolithography process..........................................2 Figure 1.2 SEM micrographs of photoresist patterns ………………………….….……....6 Figure 1.3 Etch profiles for silicon etch processes….………………………….….……....9 Figure 1.4 Silicon MEMS drug delivery device ……………………………….…...…....12 Figure 1.5 Immunoisolation biocapsule …………….………………………….…...…....12 Figure 1.6 Microcantilever sensor …………….……………………………….…...…....14 Figure 1.7 Microscale hot embossing system …………..….………………….…...…....16 Figure 1.8 Schematic diagram of the PDMS molding process ……………….…...…....18 Figure 1.9 Soft lithography processes ………………………………………….…...…....20 Figure 1.10 Polymer/metal tactile sensor ………...…………………………….…...…....22 Figure 1.11 Microfabricated polymer devices for controlled drug delivery …...…...…....23 Figure 1.12 Microfabricated tissue engineering scaffolds .…………………….…...…....24 Figure 2.1 Cytoskeletal proteins ……………………………………………….…...…....33 Figure 2.2 Molecular components of focal adhesions ...……………………….…...…....35 Figure 2.3 Cell motility process …………….....……………………………….…...…....36 Figure 2.4 Traction force microscopy ………………………………………….…...…....42 Figure 2.5 Silicon MEMS heart cell force sensor ..…………………………….…...…....44 Figure 2.6 Silicon cantilever fibroblast cell force sensor ..…………………….…...…....45

xiv

Page 16: Polymer MEMS

Figure 2.7 PDMS pillar cell force sensor ………...…………………………….…...…....45 Figure 3.1 Schematic diagram of the microtransfer molding process... ……….…...…....52 Figure 3.2 Schematic diagram of the double stamp micromolding process …...…...…....54 Figure 3.3 Optical micrographs of polystyrene spin coated on PDMS. ...………….…....56 Figure 3.4 SEM micrographs of four steps in the double stamp micromolding process ...57 Figure 3.5 Characterization of feature distortion versus polymer concentration …...…....59 Figure 3.6 Characterization of feature distortion versus transfer pressure ………....…....59 Figure 4.1 Schematic diagram of spin dewetting and pattern transfer. .……….…...…....67 Figure 4.2 AFM images of polystyrene structures fabricated by spin dewetting on a 2 µm diameter pillar mold …………………………...……………………………….…...…....69 Figure 4.3 Optical micrographs of PPMA dewetting on 20 µm diameter pillars…...…....70 Figure 4.4 Particles size versus (a) solution concentration and (b) mold feature size .......72 Figure 4.5 SEM micrographs at each step in the spin dewetting and pattern transfer process……………………………………………………………………………………73 Figure 4.6 Dewetting of polystyrene is PDMS wells ………………………….…...…....74 Figure 4.7 Nanoscale polystyrene features fabricated by spin dewetting ……...…...…....74 Figure 5.1 Schematic diagram of the lift-off process for SPAN patterning.. ….…...…....81 Figure 5.2 SEM micrographs of sacrificial layers, SPAN deposition of sacrificial layers, and SPAN patterns after lift-off ………………………………………………..…...…....83 Figure 5.3 Film thickness versus time for static and dynamic SPAN deposition ......…....85 Figure 5.4 Roughness versus time for static and dynamic SPAN deposition…........…....85 Figure 5.5 SEM micrographs of 20 µm circular SPAN patterns ……………….......…....86 Figure 6.1 Schematic diagram of the cell isolation membrane fabrication process. .…....95 Figure 6.2 Experimental setup for cell isolation …………………………………………96

xv

Page 17: Polymer MEMS

Figure 6.3 SEM micrographs of cell isolation membranes ……………………........…....98 Figure 6.4 SEM micrographs of NIH 3T3 cells isolated in circular, hexagonal, and square membrane features …………………………………………………………….......…....99 Figure 6.5 SEM micrographs of NIH 3T3 cells after removing the membrane ......…....100 Figure 6.6 Fluorescent micrographs of NIH 3T3 cells at low seeding density.. ......…....101 Figure 6.7 Fluorescent micrographs of NIH 3T3 cells at high seeding density ..………101 Figure 6.8 (a) SEM micrograph and (b) fluorescent micrograph of non-adherent THP-1 cells in circular membrane features …..……………………………………….......…....102 Figure 6.9 (a,b) Fluorescent micrographs and (c) SEM micrograph of C3A liver cell clusters in circular membrane features …………………………………………………103 Figure 7.1 Schematic diagram of the sacrificial layer micromolding process.. ………...111 Figure 7.2 Schematic diagram of the patterned substrate micromolding process ……...114 Figure 7.3 SEM microstructures fabricated by sacrificial layer micromolding ………...115 Figure 7.4 Polymer cantilevers (a) before and (b) after release of the sacrificial layer. ..116

Figure 7.5 Polymer cantilever deflected with a micropipette……...…………………...117 Figure 7.6 Polymer beams fabricated by patterned substrate micromolding …………...118 Figure 7.7 AFM images of features with and without proper selection of processing parameters ………………………………………………….……...…………………....120 Figure 8.1 Schematic diagram of the continuous stiffness measurement loading cycle..125 Figure 8.2 Schematic diagram of the process for fabricating cantilevers for lateral bending ………………………………………………………………………………….129 Figure 8.3 SEM micrographs of polymer beams for bending and nanoindentation testing…………………………………………………………………………………...130 Figure 8.4 Nanoindentation experimental setup …………………...…………………...133 Figure 8.5 Hardness and elastic modulus measured using CSM nanoindentation ...…...135 Figure 8.6 Creep measurements for PPMA, PMMA, PS, and PS/Clay………………...136

xvi

Page 18: Polymer MEMS

Figure 8.7 Scratch resistance and corresponding SEM micrographs showing film damage………………………………………………………………………………….137 Figure 8.8 Load-displacement plot for beam bending with an uncoated tip….………...138 Figure 8.9 Load-displacement plots for beam bending with PPMA, PMMA, PS, and PS/Clay beams ………………………………………………...…...…………………...139 Figure 8.10 Effects of aqueous environment and increased temperature on polymer properties……………………………………………...…….……...…………………...142 Figure 8.11 Load-displacement plots for beam bending at high loads .………………...144 Figure 8.12 Lateral bending tests with PS and PS/Clay …………...…………………...145 Figure 9.1 Schematic diagram of the fabrication process for the cell force sensor.. …...153 Figure 9.2 Circular configuration of the first generation cell force sensor …...………...156 Figure 9.3 Linear configuration of the first generation cell force sensor ….…………...157 Figure 9.4 L-beam cantilever and direction-angle convention ..…...…………………...158 Figure 9.5 Deflection plot for the first generation sensor ……….....…………………...160 Figure 9.6 SEM micrographs of the first generation cell force sensor .………………...161 Figure 9.7 Optical micrographs of cantilever bending ……..……...…………………...162 Figure 9.8 L-beam line of highest sensitivity ……………………...…………………...163 Figure 9.9 Hinge in the second generation beam design …...……...…………………...164 Figure 9.10 CAD images of second generation cell force sensor .....…………………...165 Figure 9.11 FEA simulation of second generation cantilever beam .…………………...166 Figure 9.12 Deflection plot for the second generation sensor …......…………………...167 Figure 9.13 Comparison of the deflection plots for the first and second generation sensor…………….………………………… …………………………………………..168 Figure 9.14 SEM micrographs of the second generation sensors made from PPMA and polystyrene ………………………………………………….……...…………………...169

xvii

Page 19: Polymer MEMS

Figure 9.15 Phase contrast micrographs of the sensor after sacrificial layer release ......170 Figure 9.16 Area of HT 1080 and 3T3 cells before and after spreading ..……………...171 Figure 9.17 Angle convention for third generation device ………...…………………...172 Figure 9.18 FEA loading conditions ………………………..……...…………………...173 Figure 9.19 Deflection plots for different FEA loading conditions ..…………………...174 Figure 9.20 Deflection plots for different measurement locations ...…………………...175 Figure 9.21 Comparison of the deflection plots for the first, second, and third generation cell force sensors …………………………………………………...…………………...176 Figure 9.22 SEM micrographs of the third generation sensor …......…………………...177 Figure 9.23 Plot of force angle versus beam deflection …….……...…………………...178 Figure 9.24 Plot of deflection per unit force versus force angle …...…………………...179 Figure 10.1 Experimental setup for force measurements ……..…...…………………...187 Figure 10.2 Contact angle for native, tissue culture treated, and O2 plasma modified polystyrene ………………………………………………….……...…………………...191 Figure 10.3 Optical micrographs of a fibroblast on the second generation sensor …......194 Figure 10.4 Optical micrographs of a fibroblast on the third generation sensor ……….197 Figure 10.5 Force magnitude versus time plot for a WS-1 fibroblast cell.. …………….199 Figure 10.6 Force direction versus time plot for a WS-1 fibroblast cell ……………….199 Figure 10.7 Force magnitude versus time plot for a WS-1 fibroblast cell.. …………….201 Figure 10.8 Force direction versus time plot for a WS-1 fibroblast cell ……………….201 Figure 10.9 Force and direction versus time plots for a WS-1 fibroblast cell ………….203 Figure 10.10 Force and direction versus time plots for a WS-1 fibroblast cell ..……….204 Figure 10.11 Optical micrographs of a fibroblast cell on the sensor before and after exposure to cytochalasin-D ………………………………………………….………….206

xviii

Page 20: Polymer MEMS

Figure 10.12 Force versus time plot for a WS-1 fibroblast cell exposed to cytochalasin-D ………………………………………………………………….………207 Figure 11.1 Forisome force sensor …………………..………………………………….214 Figure 11.2 SEM micrographs of the forisome force sensor ..………………………….217 Figure 11.3 Comparison of FEA and analytical solutions for forisome sensor force-deflection response …………………………………………………………..………….219 Figure 11.4 Optical micrographs of forisome before and after actuation …...………….220 Figure 11.5 SEM micrograph of a forisome on the sensor after testing …….………….221 Figure 11.6 Radial versus longitudinal forisome forces …………………….………….222 Figure A.1 Deflection plot for third generation cell force sensor ………………………229 Figure A.2 Curve fits for calculating force direction …………………………………...229 Figure A.3 Curve fits for calculating force per unit deflection …………………………234 Figure B.1 Schematic diagram of the silicon wet etch process ………………………...241 Figure B.2 SEM micrographs of silicon after TMAH etching …………………………242 Figure B.3 SEM micrographs of NaCl crystal on PDMS pillars ……………………….244 Figure B.4 SEM micrographs of sucrose particles on PDMS pillars …………………..245 Figure B.5 Plot of crystal/particle size versus NaCl and sucrose concentration ……….246 Figure B.6 SEM micrographs of ammonium heptamolybdate hydrate particles PDMS pillars……………………………………………………………………………………246 Figure B.7 SEM micrograph of poly-l-lysine particles on PDMS pillars………………247 Figure B.8 Schematic diagram of the peptide mediated deposition process.. ………….249 Figure B.9 SEM micrographs and EDS spectra of peptide mediated deposition of silica…………………………………………………………… ……………………….250 Figure B.10 SEM micrographs of peptide mediated gold deposition …………………..250 Figure B.11 Schematic diagram of the sol-gel micromolding process …..……………..252

xix

Page 21: Polymer MEMS

Figure B.12 SEM micrographs of silica micropatterns fabricated by sol-gel micromolding…………………………………………………………………………...252 Figure B.13 SEM micrographs and EDS spectra for sol-gel micromolded silica/HA nanoparticle composites ………………………………………………………………...253 Figure B.14 SEM micrographs and EDS spectra for selective sol-gel micromolding of silica/HA nanoparticle composites ……………………………………………………..255 Figure B.15 Optical micrographs of bone marrow cells grown on patterned and flat silica…………………………………………………………………………………….256 Figure B.16 SEM micrographs of bone marrow cells grown on micropatterned silica and silica/HA nanoparticles composites …………………………………………………….256

xx

Page 22: Polymer MEMS

CHAPTER 1

MICROFABRICATION AND MICROELECTROMECHANICAL SYSTEMS (MEMS)

1.1 Introduction

Micro and nanoscale devices hold great potential in a wide range of technological

fields. Micro and nanotechnology concepts have infiltrated almost every scientific

discipline including chemistry, physics, engineering, materials science, and medicine.

Research efforts in these areas are continuing to add to a growing body of knowledge and

push toward applying these concepts in ways that could have a significant impact on

society. Micro and nanoscale materials and devices have already found commercially

applications ranging from the automotive to the clothing industries. As these research and

commercialization efforts continue, no doubt additional progress will be made toward

reaching the potential that has been predicted for this field.

Traditionally micro and nanoscale devices, often referred to as micro or

nanoelectromechanical systems (MEMS and NEMS), have been fabricated from silicon-

based materials using processing techniques adapted from the semiconductor industry.

Polymer materials are increasingly being utilized in micro and nanoscale biomedical

devices. This trend is driven by a number of factors. Many polymer materials are known

to be relatively biocompatible, which allows them to be used either as implant materials

or for in vitro applications with a minimal detrimental effect on the host tissue or cells.

1

Page 23: Polymer MEMS

Polymers also have a wide range of properties with respect to bulk chemistry, surface

chemistry, and mechanical and physical properties. This broad range of properties

provides a large materials selection pool and allows materials to be chosen based on the

appropriate behavior in a specific application. In the case of micro and nanodevices,

processing costs can become a prohibitive factor due to the specialized materials,

equipment, and facilities needed to manufacture such devices. Polymer processing can

offer some distinct advantages in minimizing both materials and processing costs. Many

polymer materials have significantly lower cost relative to traditional materials used in

micro and nanodevices. Much of the processing can also be performed outside of a

cleanroom environment without expensive equipment, significantly reducing processing

costs.

1.2 Microfabrication and MEMS

1.2.1 Photolithography

Microfabrication is a term used to collectively describe a set of techniques used to

fabricate miniaturized devices for use in a variety of applications. One of the most

widely used techniques in microfabrication is the photolithography process.

Photolithography is a process of patterning photosensitive polymer (photoresist)

structures. The pattern is created by selectively exposing the photoresist to ultra violet

(UV) light. The UV exposure induces a chemical reaction in the photoresist that renders

the materials either soluble (positive resist) or insoluble (negative resist) in a chemical

developer. The photolithography process schematic for a negative photoresist is shown in

Figure 1.1.

2

Page 24: Polymer MEMS

Figure 1.1 Schematic diagram of the photolithography process for a negative photoresist.

The photolithography process can be broken down into six basic steps: substrate

preparation, pre-bake, exposure, post-exposure processing, developing, and

cleaning/drying. The first step is preparation of the substrate. Generally single crystal

silicon wafers are used, but glass, GaAs, and other materials are also used depending on

the application. The wafers are usually cleaned using piranha or the RCA cleaning

process.1 Piranha is a mixture of sulfuric acid (H2SO4) and hydrogen peroxide (H2O2) at

approximately a 3:1 ratio, respectively. The RCA cleaning procedure is an aqueous

3

Page 25: Polymer MEMS

mixture of hydrogen peroxide and ammonia (NH4OH) or hydrochloric acid (HCl). For

certain photoresists it is necessary to apply an adhesion promoter to improve the adhesion

between the wafer surface and the resist. Often this is done by vapor phase deposition of

a silane such as hexamethyldisilazane (HMDS).

The next step in the process is deposition of the photoresist. This is done by spin

coating the resist at speeds ranging from 1000-6000 rpm. The spin coating process can be

more complicated than one might expect. In its simplest form, the spin coating process is

a balance of the rotational inertial forces and the viscous shear of the fluid. The

equilibrium between these two factors leads to a uniform film thickness after the coating

process. Of course, several other factors contribute to the process. The use of volatile

solvents in the photoresists leads to a time varying viscosity of the fluid. Exhaust flow,

edge effects, and equipment variations also need to be considered. A number of

mathematical models of varying complexity have been developed to describe the spin

coating process.2,3 Process datasheets from the photoresist manufacturer usually contain

spin speed versus film thickness curves. These give a good estimate of spin coating

properties. However, given the differences in equipment and processing condition, it is

usually necessary to create spin speed versus film thickness curves empirically for each

photoresist. After spin coating, the photoresist is based to remove any residual solvent.

After coating and baking, the wafer is selectively exposed to UV through a

photomask. The mask is generally a high quality glass plate that is selectively coated with

chrome or another absorbing metal layer. For larger features, a high quality printed mask

(transparency mask) can be substituted for the chrome/glass mask.4 The mask is first

loaded into the exposure system (mask aligner). The wafer is placed below the mask and

4

Page 26: Polymer MEMS

the two pieces are either brought close to each other (proximity mode) or brought

together (contact mode). Other contact settings can be adjusted to improve the interface

between the mask and the wafer. Hard contact mode applies a stronger force to hold the

mask and wafer together and vacuum contact mode uses a vacuum to pull the wafer and

mask into tighter contact. Improving the contact between the mask and the wafer

improves the resolution of the pattern, but harder contact exposure increases wear of the

mask. Photoresist can also be transferred from the wafer to the mask, resulting in possible

defects in the pattern as well as requiring the mask to be cleaned more often. Post

exposure steps are often needed to complete the process. For example, negative tone SU8

photoresists (Microchem Corp.) require a post exposure baking process to complete the

cross linking reaction that is initiated by the UV exposure.

After exposure and post-exposure processing, the wafer is ready for the

development step. This process involves either immersion or spraying with a chemical

developer to remove the unwanted portions of the photoresist. For positive resists, the

exposed regions are removed, and for negative resist the unexposed regions are removed.

The developer chemistry depends on the photoresist. Negative tone resists are generally

developed in organic solvents, while positive resists are generally soluble in basic

solutions (e.g. NaOH). After development, the wafers are cleaned in deionized (DI)

water and dried.

Scanning electron micrographs of patterns created by photolithography are shown

in Figure 1.2. The images show features fabricated from both negative and positive

photoresist. Figure 1.2 (a) is SU8 negative photoresist and (b) is S1813 positive resist

positive resist (Shipley).

5

Page 27: Polymer MEMS

Figure 1.2 SEM micrographs of (a) 5 µm diameter SU8 pillars and (b) 5 µm diameter S1813 pillars fabricated by photolithography.

1.2.2 Silicon MEMS fabrication

The original microfabrication processes were developed for the microelectronics

integrated circuit (IC) industry. By combining IC manufacturing techniques with silicon-

based deposition and machining techniques, it is possible to integrate electrical and

mechanical elements (e.g. sensors, actuators, motors, pumps, etc.) on a single silicon

platform.

6

Processing techniques for silicon-based MEMS fabrication vary widely depending

on the materials and applications being considered. MEMS processing can broadly be

separated into two categories, deposition and machining. Deposition techniques allow

different silicon-based materials to be used as either sacrificial or structural materials in

MEMS. Some commonly used structural materials are polycrystalline silicon

(polysilicon) and silicon nitride (Si3N4). Silicon oxide (SiO2) is generally used as a

sacrificial material but can be used as a structural material for certain applications. Other

materials, both silicon and non-silicon based, have begun to gain attention for specific

applications. For example, significant research has focused on silicon carbide (SiC)

Page 28: Polymer MEMS

MEMS for high temperature, extreme environment applications.5 Other examples include

shape memory alloys6 and magnetic materials.7

Deposition of silicon-based materials is usually done via chemical means.

Polysilicon and Si3N4 are usually deposited using chemical vapor deposition (CVD) or

low pressure chemical vapor deposition (LPCVD). CVD and LPCVD depositions are

performed in tube furnaces at high temperature. The reaction of gases introduced to the

furnace leads to deposition of a solid material on the silicon wafer surface. Silicon oxide

can also be deposited via CVD or LPCVD, but it can also be grown by thermal oxidation

of a silicon substrate.

Physical methods are also used to deposit materials for MEMS applications.

Physical vapor deposition (PVD) processes do not rely on any chemical reaction for the

deposition. PVD processes include sputter coating and electron beam (e-beam)

evaporation and are often used for metal deposition in MEMS processing.

After thin film deposition and photolithography, materials are selectively

removed, or etched, to produce the structural or mechanical elements of MEMS.

Processes for selectively removing materials are referred to as micromachining

techniques. Theses processes are categorized as either surface or bulk micromachining. In

the case of bulk micromachining, the wafer material itself is used as the structural

material for the device. In surface micromachining, a material deposited on the surface of

the wafer is used as the structural material.

Methods of micromachining silicon-based materials can be separated into several

categories depending on the nature of the etching process and the resulting etch profile.

Wet versus dry etching refers to the physical conditions in which the etching is

7

Page 29: Polymer MEMS

performed. Wet processes use liquid chemical etchants that dissolve the solid material.

Dry etches use reactive gases to etch the materials by either chemical (plasma etching) or

a combination of physical and chemical processes (reactive ion etching). The resulting

etch profile determines if the etch is anisotropic or isotropic. Isotropic etches remove

material at an equal rate independent of direction. Anisotropic etches preferentially

remove material in a specific direction. The selectivity can either be based on the

crystallographic orientation of the substrate or on the directionality of the etch process.

For example, potassium hydroxide (KOH) etches silicon around 400 times faster in the

<100> crystallographic direction compared to the <111> direction.8 The resulting etch

profile for a <100> wafer gives a V-shaped groove with a 54.74º angle between the wafer

surface the sidewall of the groove. Directionality in dry etching (plasma and RIE) is not

based on the crystallography of the substrate, but is controlled by the etch conditions.

Isotropic or anisotropic etching can be achieved depending on the etching parameters.

The difference in the etch profiles for isotropic and anisotropic etches are shown in

Figure 1.3. Various gases are used for dry etching processes. Some common examples

are SF6, CF4, and Cl2. Gas mixtures that incorporate O2, He, and other gases are also used

to increase etch rates, control etch directionality, or for cooling.9 Table 1.1 gives some

examples of different silicon based etching processes and their characteristics. Note that

this table is not a comprehensive list of etch processes, and only provides a few

commonly used examples. For a more complete list, see Madou’s book Fundamentals of

Microfabrication.8

8

Page 30: Polymer MEMS

Figure 1.3 Typical profiles for silicon based etches.

Etch Chemistry Etch Material Mask Material Wet or dry

HNA Si Si3N4 wet

KOH Si Si3N4/SiO2 wet

TMAH Si SiO2Si3N4 wet

HF, Buffered HF SiO2 Photoresist wet

CF4 SiO2 Photoresist dry

CHF3 Si3N4 Photoresist dry

SF6 Si/PolySi Photoresist dry

Cl2 Si/PolySi Photoresist dry

Table 1.1 Typical etch processes for silicon based materials.

Another important step in the micromachining process is selecting a masking

material. The mask protects the underlying material during the etching process. A high

degree of selectivity is desirable, especially for long or deep etches. The selectivity refers

to the relative etch rate of the substrate material compared to the masking material. Some

9

Page 31: Polymer MEMS

examples of typical masking materials for a given etch are shown in Table 1.1. In the

case of dry etches with photoresist etch masks, the photoresists typically have relatively

poor selectivity. This requires that the etch depth be rather small or that a thick

photoresist layer be used in order to provide sufficient masking for longer etches.

1.2.3 Applications of silicon MEMS

Silicon MEMS have found commercial applications in a number of different

industries. According to a report by BCC Research, the market for MEMS processing

equipment and devices was estimated $5 billion in 2005 and is expected to grow by more

than 20% per year to more than $12.5 billion by 2010.10 Another report by Yole

Développement estimates a MEMS devices market of around $6 billion in 2006 with an

increase to approximately $11 billion dollars in 2011.11 One example of a commercially

successful device is the MEMS accelerometer, which is widely used in automotive airbag

deployment system. MEMS devices have also found commercial applications in

manufacturing of ink jet printer heads, optical devices, pressure sensors, and various

radio frequency device (RF MEMS).12 Significant research efforts in industry and

academia continue to focus on silicon MEMS device development, processing, materials,

and reliability.

1.2.4 Silicon-based BioMEMS

Medicine and biology have been significantly impacted, both from a research and

commercial perspective, by the development of MEMS technology. Silicon devices have

been considered for drug delivery devices, immunoisolation devices, and sensors, just to

10

Page 32: Polymer MEMS

name a few. Several review articles are available that summarize research efforts in these

areas.13-16

Figure 1.4 shows an example of a silicon MEMS device for drug delivery.17 The

device consists of an array of drug containing microreservoirs that can be triggered to

release a specific quantity or type of drug. The release mechanism is based on

electrochemically induced dissolution of metal covers on top of the reservoirs. One of the

advantages of this device is that the release can be externally controlled to allow a

continuous or time varying release profile. Another advantage of the individually

addressable reservoirs is the ability to release multiple different drugs as needed. The

device was tested in a dog model and showed steady release of drug over the course of 6

months.18 A more recent version of this device is being commercialized by MicroCHIPS,

Inc.

11

Page 33: Polymer MEMS

Figure 1.4 Silicon MEMS microchip for controlled drug delivery (17).

Figure 1.5 Immunoisolation biocapsule for insulin delivery (19).

The device in Figure 1.5 is designed for immunoisolation of xenografted

pancreatic islet cells for the treatment of diabetes.19 The device uses a nanoporous

membrane with very small (down to 7 nm) pores to isolate the encapsulated cells from 12

Page 34: Polymer MEMS

the host immune response while allowing size specific exchange of certain materials. The

membrane with 18 nm pores was shown to significantly reduce Immunoglobulin G (IgG)

diffusion while maintaining insulin diffusion. The device was tested in a mouse model

and effectively provided immunoisolation of the encapsulated cells over a short period of

time (1 week).20

Silicon MEMS are also used in a number of biomedical sensors. Several different

detection mechanisms are used in bioMEMS sensors. Some of the more common are

mechanical, optical and electrochemical detection. As an example, we will consider

mechanical microcantilever sensors. Figure 1.6 shows a schematic of the detection

mechanism for this type of sensor.21 A target molecule is bound to the surface of the

microcantilever. Binding of a receptor molecule creates a stress that causes the cantilever

to deflect. The amount of bending is proportional to the amount of bound receptor. This

concept has been used to characterize DNA hybridization21 and was sensitive enough to

detect a single base pair mismatch between two ssDNA molecules. The same concept has

been used to measure receptor-ligand binding. In experiments by Wu et al.22

microcantilevers were used to measure low concentrations (down to 6 ng/ml) of prostate

specific antigen (PSA), a key marker for prostate cancer. Microcantilevers have also been

used to detect larger particles such as viruses.23 In this case, a change in the resonant

frequency of the cantilever was used as the detection mechanism. When virus particles

attach to the surface of the cantilever, the mass increases which leads to a decrease in the

resonant frequency. This sensor is capable of measuring the attachment of a single virus.

13

Page 35: Polymer MEMS

Figure 1.6 Detection mechanism for microcantilever sensors. Binding between receptor and target molecules creates a surface stress that bends the cantilever. (21)

1.2.5 Microfluidics

One of the most commercially successful and well-researched areas of the MEMS

field is microfluidic devices. Microfluidic devices are current being explored for

applications that include medical diagnostics,24 DNA and proteomic analysis,25-27 and

drug screening.27 The basic concept of microfluidics involves the miniaturization and

automation of analytical equipment to allow complete analysis on a single chip with little

or no user intervention. Miniaturization of analytical devices allows portability, parallel

analysis, rapid response, and improved efficiency, while automation allows devices to be

used by non-skilled operators. These devices could potentially allow point of care 14

Page 36: Polymer MEMS

medical diagnostics in a fraction of the time currently needed for traditional laboratory

testing. Microfluidic DNA and proteomics chips have the potential to vastly improve the

time and efficiency of DNA and protein sample preparation, separation, and analysis. It

is not difficult to imagine the potential improvements in patient care and laboratory

technology that could be achieved through these devices. However, the integration of all

the necessary control components and sensing mechanisms needed for a functional

microsystem continues to be an elusive problem.

In order to achieve the automation and miniaturization that are desired in the

microfluidic device, a host of different functional components must be simultaneously

incorporated into a single, small scale device. These components can include valves,

pumps, reaction chambers, separation mechanisms, and detectors.

Given the small size of many of the components of microfluidic systems,

microfabrication has logically been the method of choice for fabrication of microfluidic

systems. A number of different materials and microfabrication techniques have been

employed. Silicon and glass were the first materials to be considered due to their

common use in microfabrication and MEMS, but for cost considerations and ease of

fabrication, polymer based systems have begun to dominate the field.

Fabrication methods for polymer microfluidic devices vary significantly from

silicon MEMS. Polymer devices are usually fabricated from thermoplastic polymers like

poly(methyl methacrylate) (PMMA) or polycarbonate or from the elastomer

polydimethylsiloxane (PDMS). Devices made from thermoplastic polymers are

commonly fabricated by hot embossing or injection molding.28,29 The first step in the hot

embossing process is fabrication of a mold. The mold is usually made from a hard

15

Page 37: Polymer MEMS

material such as a metal (e.g. nickel) or silicon or from a polymer with a high glass

transition temperature relative to the substrate material. The mold is generally fabricated

using standard microfabrication processes (photolithography, etching, etc.) sometimes in

combination with other processes (e.g. electroplating). The mold is then used as a tool to

fabricate multiple polymer devices. The substrate and/or mold are heated above the glass

transition temperature of the substrate polymer. Pressure is then applied to the mold to

transfer the channel pattern into the polymer. An image of a commercially available

microscale hot embossing system (EVG 520, EV Group) is shown in Figure 1.7. The

system consists of two heated/cooled plates with computer controlled hydraulics that

apply pressure to the plates. The pressure and temperature versus time profiles can both

be programmed.

Figure 1.7 (a) Commercially available microscale hot embossing system (EVG 520), (b) close-up of the heated plates.

Another commonly used method for fabrication of polymer microfluidic is soft

lithography. Soft lithography covers a wide range of fabrication techniques that involve 16

Page 38: Polymer MEMS

replication of microstructures in a soft material (PDMS).30 The PDMS microstructures

can then be used directly in device applications (such as microfluidics) or as tools for

further fabrication processes. The use of PDMS microstructures as microfabrication tools

will be discussed in detail in a later section.

The Effenhauser group was also one of the first to use PDMS for microfluidics.31

They focused specifically on polydimethylsiloxane (PDMS) as the structural material in a

protein separation device. Duffy et al.4 further expanded the use of PDMS as a materials

in microfluidic systems. In addition to the reduction in cost resulting form the use of

PDMS, the photomask used in the initial fabrication process was printed on a high

resolution printer instead of the expensive methods used in traditional photomask

fabrication. They also developed a method for covalently sealing PDMS to a number of

substrates with a simple exposure to an oxygen plasma. Oxygen plasma also changes the

surface chemistry of the PDMS, rendering it hydrophilic, versus its native, highly

hydrophobic state. This allows for easier filling of the PDMS microchannels with polar

fluids such as water and biological fluids. The charged surface of oxidized PDMS (SiO-)

also provides a negatively charged surface that is conducive to electroosmotic flow.32 A

significant amount of research has since focused on PDMS microfluidic devices for a

wide range of applications. Several review papers have been published in this area.33-35

1.2.6 Polymer microfabrication

17

In addition to microfluidic devices, polymers are being used more frequently in

other microfabricated devices. Many polymer microfabrication techniques are based on

soft lithography. Figure 1.8 shows the process for fabrication of PDMS molds for soft

lithography. A photoresist master is first fabricated using photolithography or another

Page 39: Polymer MEMS

micro/nanofabrication procedure. The PDMS prepolymer is mixed with a curing agent

and poured over the master and allowed to cure. The master pattern is transfer to the

PDMS creating a negative replica of the original pattern.

Figure 1.8 Schematic diagram for fabricating a PDMS mold from a photoresist master.

Whitesides et al. developed the original soft lithography techniques and

subsequently used them to create micropatterns and microstructures from a variety of

materials. Microtransfer molding (µTM)36 and micromolding in capillaries (MIMIC)37

use microfabricated PDMS molds as templates for further replication of polymer

structures. In µTM, a prepolymer is applied to the PDMS mold. The excess polymer on

top of the mold is removed and the mold is applied to a substrate. The prepolymer is then

18

Page 40: Polymer MEMS

cured using UV or heat. This process will be discussed in more detail in Chapter 3. For

the MIMIC process, the mold is applied to the substrate and a prepolymer solution is

applied to one side of the mold. The prepolymer fills the features in the mold either by

capillary action or using vacuum. The prepolymer is then cured and the mold is removed.

Related soft lithography techniques include replica molding, solvent assisted

micromolding,38 and microcontact printing (µCP).39 In solvent assisted micromolding,

the PDMS is used to imprint a polymer that is dissolved in a solvent. The solvent diffuses

through the mold over time, leaving only the polymer in the microfeatures. In µCP, the

PDMS mold is “inked” with a specific chemistry, then the mold is brought into contact

with a substrate, selectively transferring the chemical pattern to the substrate. This

process is generally used for micropatterning self assembled monolayers (SAMs) or

proteins.40 Each of these processes are shown in Figure 1.9.

19

Page 41: Polymer MEMS

Figure 1.9 Schematics for soft lithography processes (38).

Since the development of these initial processing techniques, several variations or

related techniques have been developed.41,42 These processes have greatly broadened the

versatility of the soft lithographic microfabrication techniques. In addition to processing

traditional polymers, significant process has also been made in micropatterning

20

Page 42: Polymer MEMS

functional materials such as conducting polymers,43-45 piezoelectric polymers,46,47

biodegradable polymers,48,49 and hydrogels.50

While soft lithography processes have found broad applications, they are

generally limited to fabrication of two-dimensional (2D) or extruded 2D structures. For

fabrication of more complicated three-dimensional shapes or suspended mechanical

structures, more complicated techniques are required. In some cases, traditional

microfabrication techniques such as photolithography with SU8 photoresist and

specialized etching and sacrificial layer techniques can be used to fabricate structural

components in polymer MEMS.51,52 In other cases, more complicated techniques such as

two-photon lithography53,54 and microstereolithography55 can be used to fabricate 3D

polymer structures. However, these processes have additional limitations such as high

cost, diminished resolution, and low throughput.

1.2.7 Applications of polymer MEMS

Microfabricated polymer structures have found applications in a number of areas,

either in the form of all polymer devices or as components in MEMS. Polymers are used

in electronic and optical devices. For example, conducting polymers have been used to

make all organic field effect transistors (FETs).56,57 Soft lithography has been used to

fabricate polymer waveguides.58 Polymers have also been used as components in various

sensors (pressure sensors, accelerometers, etc.).59 Figure 1.10 shows a hybrid

polymer/metal tactile sensor capable of measuring hardness, thermal conductivity,

temperature and surface contour.60

21

Page 43: Polymer MEMS

Figure 1.10 Hybrid polymer/metal tactile sensor (60).

Polymer microfabrication has also been used extensively in the biomedical field.

One of the advantages of microfabrication and MEMS is the ability to interface with cells

on their size scale. This ability to interact with, manipulate, and perform measurements

on a single cell and biomolecular level has lead to new devices and therapeutic

approaches. Some examples include drug delivery devices,61,62 tissue engineering

scaffolds,46,47 and cell micromanipulation devices.63 Figure 1.11 shows several examples

of microfabricated drug delivery devices. Figure 1.11 (a) is a polymer microreservior

system for drug delivery. Biodegradable polymers are used to provide controlled drug

release. Figure 1.11 (b-d) shows microfabricated biodegradable polymer microparticles

for drug delivery. Microsphere delivery systems are used in several commercial drug

delivery systems to give long term, sustained release.64 Microfabrication provides a

method to produce monodisperse particles that could potentially provide a more stable

release profile than particles produced using current manufacturing methods.

Microfabrication also allows fabrication of multiple particle geometries as opposed to

22

Page 44: Polymer MEMS

only spheres. Flat square or circular particles, high and low aspect ratio cylinders, and

many other geometries can be fabricated. Particle geometry could be used to give specific

release profiles.

Figure 1.11 (a) Polymer microchip drug delivery device (65), (b) square poly(lactic-co-glycolic acid) (PLGA) microparticles fabricated by soft lithography (61), (c) high aspect ratio and (d) low aspect ratio PLGA microparticles fabricated by soft lithography (66).

Scale bars equal 50 µm, 5 µm, and 20 µm in (b), (c), and (d), respectively.

23

Figure 1.12 shows two polymer tissue engineering scaffolds fabricated using soft

lithography. Microfabrication is often used in tissue engineering to provide highly

controlled cellular environments at the microscale.67 This is an important factor in

determining cell behavior. Microfabrication techniques allow precise control of

microarchitecture to engineer structure with well-defined pore size and porosity. Figure

Page 45: Polymer MEMS

12 (a) shows a PLGA tissue engineering scaffold fabricated by embossing and CO2

assisted bonding68 and (b) shows a polycaprolactone (PCL) scaffold fabricated using

multilayer micromolding.49

Figure 1.12 Microfabricated (a) PLGA (68) and (b) PCL (49) tissue engineering scaffolds.

1.3 Conclusion

MEMS have found applications in wide range of industries and continue to be a

focus area in the research community. Silicon micromachining techniques including

24

Page 46: Polymer MEMS

deposition and silicon micromachining are well established and well characterized

processes. One of the major focuses of MEMS research and commercialization efforts

has been in the biomedical field. Using microdevices to interface with biology on a

cellular and molecular level has led to new diagnostic, therapeutic, and sensor

applications. As the field of MEMS has progressed, polymers have been increasingly

considered as structural and functional components for specific applications. Polymers

offer several advantages over silicon-based materials, including biocompatibility, diverse

chemical, physical, and mechanical properties, and low cost materials and processing

techniques. The push toward incorporating polymers into MEMS devices has led to the

development of new microfabrication techniques to meet the unique challenges of

polymer processing. Some of the focus areas for polymer MEMS research are

microfluidic analytical devices, sensors, drug delivery devices, and tissue engineering. As

research in these areas continues and new applications are explored, advances will no

doubt be made toward the development of low cost, functional polymer MEMS devices

for a wide range of applications in biomedicine and other fields.

References

1 W. Kern (ed.), Handbook of Semiconductor Wafer Cleaning Technology: Science, Technology, and Applications, Noyes, Park Ridge, NJ (1993). 2 A.G. Ernslie, F.T. Bonner, L.G. Peck, “Flow of a viscous liquid on a rotating disk.” Journal of Applied Physics 29 (1958) 858-862. 3 D. Meyerhofer, “Characteristics of resist films produced by spinning.” Journal of Applied Physics 49 (1978) 3993-3997. 4 D.C. Duffy, J.C. McDonald, O.J.A. Schueller, G.M. Whitesides, “Rapid prototyping of microfluidic systems in poly(dimethylsiloxane).” Analytical Chemistry 70 (1998) 4974-4984.

25

Page 47: Polymer MEMS

5 M. Mehregany, C.A. Zorman, “SiC MEMS: opportunities and challenges for applications in harsh environments.” Thin Solid Films 355-356 (1999) 518-524. 6 Y. Fu, H. Du, W. Huang, S. Zhang, M. Hu, “TiNi-based thin films in MEMS applications: a review.” Sensors and Actuators A 112 (2004) 395-408. 7 D. Niarchos, “Magnetic MEMS: key issues and some applications.” Sensors and Actuators A 109 (2003) 166-173. 8 M. Madou, Fundumentals of Microfabrication, CRC Press, Boca Raton, FL (1997) pp.171. 9 H. Janseny, H. Gardeniers, M. de Boer, M. Elwenspoek, J. Fluitman, “A survey on the reactive ion etching of silicon in microtechnology.” Journal of Micromechanics and Microengineering 6 (1996) 14-28. 10 Microelectromechanical Systems (MEMS) Technology: Current And Future Markets, BCC Research (2006). 11 Global MEMS/Microsystems - Markets and Opportunities, Yole Développement (2007). 12 W.H. Ko, “Trends and frontiers of MEMS.” Sensors and Actuators A 136 (2007) 62-67. 13 R.S. Shawgo, A.C. Richards Gradyson, Y.W. Li, M.J. Cima, “BioMEMS for drug delivery.” Current Opinions in Solid State Materials Science 6 (2002) 329-334. 14 A.C. Richards Grayson, R.S. Shawgo, Y. Li, M.J. Cima, “Electronic MEMS for triggered delivery.” Advanced Drug Delivery Reviews 56 (2004) 173-184. 15 S.L. Tao, T.A. Desai, “Microfabricated drug delivery systems: from particles to pores.” Advanced Drug Delivery Reviews 55 (2003) 315-328. 16 R. Bashir, “BioMEMS: state-of-the-art in detection, opportunities and prespects.” Advanced Drug Delivery Reviews 56 (2004) 1565-1585. 17 J. Santini, M.J. Cima, R.J. Langer, “A controlled-release microchip.” Nature 397 (1999) 335-338. 18 M. Staples, K. Daniel, M.J. Cima, R. Langer, “Application of micro- and nano-electromechanical devices to drug delivery.” Pharmaceutical Research 23 (2006) 847-863.

26

Page 48: Polymer MEMS

19 T.A. Desai, D. Hansford, M. Ferrari, “Characterization of micromachined silicon membranes for immunoisolation and bioseparation applications.” Journal of Membrane Science 159 (1999) 221-231. 20 T.A. Desai, W.H. Chu, G. Rasi, P. Sinibaldi-Vallebona, E. Guarino, “Microfabricated biocapsules provide short-term immunoisolation of insulinoma xenografts.”Biomedical Microdevices 1 (1999) 131-138. 21 J. Fritz, M.K. Baller, H.P. Land. H. Rothuizen, P. Vettiger, E. Meyer, H.-H. Güntherodt, Ch. Gerber, J.K. Gimzewski, “Translating biomolecular recognition into nanomechanics.” Science 288 (2000) 316-318. 22 G. Wu, R.H. Datar, K.M. Hansen, T. Thundat, R.J. Cote, A. Majumdar, “Bioassy of prostate-specific antigen (PSA) using microcantilevers.” Nature Biotechnology 19 (2001) 856-860. 23 A. Gupta, D. Akin, R. Bashir, “Single virus particle mass detection using microresonators with nanoscale thickness.” Applied Physics Letters 84 (2004) 1976-1978. 24 T.H. Schulte, R.L. Bardell, B.H. Weigl, “Microfluidic technologies in clinical diagnostics.” Clinica Chimica Acta 321 (2002) 1-10. 25 G.H.W. Sanders, A. Manz, ”Chip-based Microsystems for genomic and proteomic analysis.” Trends in Analytical Chemistry 19 (2000) 364-378. 26 Yu, X.; Zhang, D.; Li, T.; Hao, L.; Li, X. “3-D microarrys biochip for DNA amplification in polydimethylsiloxane (PDMS) elastomer.” Sensors and Actuators A 108 (2003) 103-107. 27 M.T. Cronin, T. Boone, A.P. Sassi, H. Tan, Q. Xue, S.J. Williams, A.J. Ricco, H.H. Hooper. “Plastic microfluidic systems for high-throughput genomic analysis and drug screening.” Journal of the Association for Laboratory Automation 6 (2001) 71-75. 28 H. Becker, C. Gärtner, “Polymer microfabrication methods for microfluidic analytical applications.” Electrophoresis 21 (2000) 12-26. 29 H. Becker, C. Gärtner, “Polymer microfabrication technologies for microfluidic systems.” Analytical and Bioanalytical Chemistry 390 (2008) 89-111. 30 Y. Xia, G.M. Whitesides, “Soft lithography.” Angewandte Chemie International Edition 37 (1998) 550-575. 31 C.S. Effenhauser, G.J.M. Bruin, A. Paulus, M. Ehart, Analytical Chemistry 69 (1997) 3451-3457.

27

Page 49: Polymer MEMS

32 J.S. Buch, P.-C. Wang, D.L. DeVoe, C.S. Lee, “Field-effect flow control in a polydimethylsoloxane based microfluidic system.” Electrophoresis 22 (2001), 3902-3907. 33 J.C. McDonald, D.C. Duffy, J.R. Anderson, D.T. Chiu, H. Wu, O.J.A. Scheuller, G.M. Whitesides, “Fabrication of microfluidic systems in poly(dimethylsiloxane).” Electrophoresis 21 (2000), 27-40. 34 S.K. Sia, G.M. Whitesides, “Microfluidic devices fabricated in poly(dimethylsiloxane) for biological studies.” Electrophoresis 24 (2003), 3563-3576. 35 J.M.K. Ng, I. Gitlin, A.D. Stroock, G.M. Whitesides, “Components for integrated poly(dimethylsiloxane) microfluidic systems.” Electrophoresis 23 (2002), 3461-3473. 36 X.-M. Zhoa, Y. Xia, and G.M. Whitesides, “Fabrication of three-dimensional micro-structures: microtransfer molding.” Advanced Materials 8 (1996) 837-840. 37 E. Kim, Y. Xia, and G.M. Whitesides, “Polymer microstructures formed by moulding in capillaries.” Nature 376 (1995) 581-584. 38 Y. Xia, G.M. Whitesides, “Soft lithography.” Annual Review of Materials Science 28 (1998) 153-184. 39 A. Kumar, G.M. Whitesides, “Features of gold having micrometer to centimeter dimensions can be formed through a combination of stamping with an elastomeric stamp and an alkanethiol “ink” followed by chemical etching.” Applied Physics Letters 61 (1993) 2002-2004. 40 R.S. Kane, S. Takayama, E. Ostuni, D.E. Ingber, G.M. Whitesides, “Patterning proteins and cells using soft lithography.” Biomaterials 20 (1999) 2363-2376. 41 J.A. Rogers, R.G. Nuzzo, “Recent progress in soft lithography.” Materials Today 8(2) (2005) 50-56. 42 M. Wang, H.-G. Braun, T. Kratzmüller, E. Meyer, “Patterning polymers by micro-fluid-contact printing.” Advanced Materials 13 (2001) 1312-1317. 43 W.S. Beh, I.T. Kim, D. Qin, Y. Xia, G.M. Whitesides, “Formation of patterned microstructures of conducting polymers by soft lithography, and applications in microelectronic device fabrication.” Advanced Materials 11 (1999) 1038-1041. 44 J.A. Rogers, Z. Boa, V.R. Raju, “Nonphotolithographic fabrication of organic transistors with micron feature sizes.” Applied Physics Letters 72 (1998) 2716-2718.

28

Page 50: Polymer MEMS

45 T. Granlund, T. Nyberg, L.S. Roman, M. Svensson, O. Inganäs, “Patterning of polymer light-emitting diodes by soft lithography.” Advanced Materials 12 (2000) 269-273. 46 B. Xu, F. Arias, S.T. Brittain, X.-M. Zhao, B. Grzybowski, S. Torquato, G.M. Whitesides, “Making negative Poisson’s ratio microstructures by soft lithography.” Advanced Materials 11 (1999) 1186-1189. 47 D. Gallego, N. Ferrell, D. Hanford, “Fabrication of Piezoelectric Polyvinylidene Fluoride (PVDF) Microstructures by Soft Lithography for Tissue Engineering and Cell Biology Applications.” in Printing Methods for Electronics, Photonics and Biomaterials, edited by G. Gigli (Mater. Res. Soc. Symp. Proc. Volume 1002E, Warrendale, PA, 2007) 1002-N04-05. 48 G. Vozzi, C. Flaim, A. Ahluwalia, S. Bhatia, “Fabrication of PLGA scaffolds using soft lithography and microsyringe deposition.” Biomaterials 24 (2003), 2533-2540. 49 D. Gallego, N. Ferrell, Y. Sun, D.J. Hansford, “Multilayer micromolding of degradable polymer tissue engineering scaffolds.” Materials Science and Engineering C (in press). 50 J. Guan, H. He, D.J. Hansford, L.J. Lee, “Self-folding of three-dimensional hydrogel microstructures.” The Journal of Physical Chemistry B 109 (2005) 23134-23137. 51 G. Genolet, J. Brugger, M. Despont, U. Drechsler, P. Vettiger, N.F. de Rooij, D. Anselmetti, “Soft, entirely photoplastic probes for scanning force microscopy.” Review of Scientific Instruments 70 (1999) 2398-2401. 52 X. Wang, J. Engel, C. Liu, “Liquid crystal polymer (LCP) for MEMS: processes and applications.” Journal of Micromechanics and Microengineering 13 (2003) 628-633. 53 G. Witzgall, R. Vrijen, E. Yablonovitch, V. Doan, B.J. Schwartz, “Single-shot two-photon exposure of commercial photoresist for the production of three-dimensional structures.” Optics Letters 23 (1998) 1745-1747. 54 T. Baldacchini, C.N. LaFratta, R.A. Farrer, “Acrylic-based resin with favorable properties for three-dimensional two-photon polymerization.” Journal of Applied Physics 95 (2004) 6072-6076. 55 A. Bertsch, H. Lorenz, P. Renaud, “3D microfabrication by combining microstereolithography and thick resist UV lithography.” Sensors and Actuators A 73 (1999) 14-23. 56 W.S. Beh, I.T. Kim, D. Qin, Y. Xia, G.M. Whitesides, “Formation of patterned microstructure of conducing polymer by soft lithography, and applications in microelectronic device fabrication.” Advanced Materials 11 (1999) 1038-1041.

29

Page 51: Polymer MEMS

57 H. Sirringhaus, T. Kawase, R.H. Friend, T. Shimoda, M. Inbasekaran, W. Wu, E.P. Woo, “High-resolution inkjet printing of all-polymer transistor circuits.” Science 290 (2000) 2123-2126. 58 X.-M. Zhao, S.P. Smith, S.J. Waldman, G.M. Whitesides, M. Prentiss, “Demonstration of waveguide couplers fabricated using microtrasnfer molding.” Applied Physics Letters 71 (1997) 1017-1019. 59 C. Liu, “Recent developments in polymer MEMS.” Advanced Materials 19 (2007) 3783-3790.

60 J. Engel, J. Chen, Z. Fan, C. Liu, “Polymer micromachined multimodal tactile sensors.” Sensors and Actuators A 117 (2005) 50-61.

61 G. Guan, N. Ferrell, L.J. Lee, D.J. Hansford, “Fabrication of polymeric microparticles for drug delivery by soft lithography.” Biomaterials 27 (2006) 4034-4041.

62 S.L. Tao, T.A. Desai, “Microfabrication of multilayer, asymmetric, polymeric devices for drug delivery.” Advanced Materials 17 (2005) 1625-1630.

63 N. Chronis, L.P. Lee, “Electrothermally activated SU-8 microgripper for single cell manipulation in solution.” Journal of Microelectromechanical Systems 14 (2005) 857-863.

64 M. Ferrari, A. Lee, L.J. Lee (eds.), Biological and Biomedical Nanotechnology, Springer, Boston, MA (2006).

65 A.C. Richards Grayson, I.S. Choi, B.M. Tyler, P.P. Wang, H. Brem, M.J. Cima, R. Langer, “Multi-pulse drug delivery from a resorbable polymeric microchip device.” Nature Materials 2 (2003) 767-772.

66 A. Chakrapani, “Processing and characterization of polymer microparticles for controlled drug delivery systems.” Ph.D. Thesis, Ohio State University (2007).

67 S.N. Bhatia, C.S. Chen, “Tissue engineering at the microscale.” Biomedical Microdevices 2 (1999) 131-144.

68 Y. Yang, S. Basu, D.L. Tomasko, L. James Lee, S.-T. Yang, “Fabrication of well-defined PLGA scaffolds using microembossing and carbon dioxide bonding.” Biomaterials 26 (2005) 2585-2594.

30

Page 52: Polymer MEMS

CHAPTER 2

CELL MECHANICS

2.1 Introduction

Cell mechanics is a broad field that covers a range of mechanical processes,

structural elements, and mechanical properties as they relate to cells and cell behavior.

Cell processes such as adhesion and motility have a significant mechanical component.

Less intuitive and less understood is the role of mechanical forces in regulating other

biochemical processes that ultimately control cell behavior. This interrelationship

between mechanical and biochemical processes is currently an active area of research

often referred to as mechanotrasduction or chemomechanical transduction.1 Mechanical

cues act as regulatory signals to control intracellular biochemical processes. External

factors like extracellular matrix or substrate stiffness and external shear stress are

involved in mediating a host of cell processes including gene expression, differentiation,

and proliferation. Cells are also responsible for generating forces that are transmitted to

the external environment. In fibroblast cells, for example, intracellular forces are

transmitted to the extracellular space and play a critical role in cell movement, adhesion,

and signal transduction.

The breadth and depth of the field of cell biomechanics makes a comprehensive

review of the field impractical. A few specific areas of cell mechanics will be covered as

31

Page 53: Polymer MEMS

they relate to the development and testing of the polymer MEMS cell force sensor

described in Chapters 9 and 10. Topics such as muscle cell mechanics or mechanics of

non-adherent cells will not be discussed in detail. Several measurement devices and

techniques for evaluating and measuring cell mechanics will be covered.

2.2 Cell mechanics and cell forces

2.2.1 The cytoskeleton

The cytoskeleton is set of proteins in the cell that act as the primary load bearing

and force generating component of the cell. The cytoskeleton consists of three primary

proteins: actin, microtubules, and intermediate filaments. A host of associated proteins

and protein complexes are responsible for polymerization and depolymerization of

cytoskeletal components, linking cytoskeletal component to each other and to the

extracellular space, and regulating cytoskeletal function. Figure 2.1 shows the three

molecular components of the cytoskeleton. F-actin, which is the filament form of the

monomer G-actin, is the primary structural component of most cell types. Actin filaments

consist of twisted strands of actin and have a diameter of 7-9 nm. Actin filaments are

polar molecules with a positive barded end where polymerization takes place and a

negative pointed end where depolymerization occurs. Actin filaments are responsible in

large part for maintaining the structure and morphology of the cells. Polymerization and

depolymerization of actin filaments is also the primary mechanism of cell motility in

adherent cells such as fibroblast.

Microtubules are tubular dimeric proteins consisting of alternating strands of α

and β tubulin. Microtubules are larger than actin filaments, with an outside diameter of

32

Page 54: Polymer MEMS

about 25 nm. They are also polar, and polymerize faster from the plus end. Microtubules

also play a structural role in the cell as well as being involved cell division and transport

processes. Microtubules work in connection with the motor proteins dynein and kinesin

to provide directional transport of organelles.

Figure 2.1 Cytoskeletal proteins, (A) actin filament, (B) microtubule, and (C) intermediate filament (2).

33

Page 55: Polymer MEMS

Intermediate filaments are large subset of cytoskeletal proteins. In terms of size,

their diameter is between that of actin filaments and microtubules (~10 nm), thus the

name intermediate filaments. The assembly process for intermediate filaments has several

general steps as shown in Figure 2.1. Polypeptides first assemble into coiled dimers then

into tetramer. The individual tetramers assemble into a protofilament. Protofilments then

assemble in filaments. Unlike actin filaments and microtubules, intermediate filaments

are highly stable.

2.2.2 Forces generated by adherent cells

When adherent cells are attached to the extracellular matrix or a tissue culture

surface, stresses are generated within the cytoskeleton. Cytoskeletal stresses are

responsible for maintaining the structural integrity of the cell and regulating cellular

shape and spreading. Molecular linkages between the cytoskeleton and focal adhesion

complexes (FACs) transmit forces to the extracellular space. Figure 2.2 shows the

molecular mechanism of force transmission.3 Within FACs, actin filaments are connected

to transmembrane integrin receptors via protein linkages. Various proteins and protein

complexes are involved in linking actin filaments to integrins. Some examples include α-

actinin, talin, paxillin, and viculin.2,3 Integrins are then attached either to the extracellular

matrix (in vivo) or to proteins on the cell culture substrate (in vitro).

34

Page 56: Polymer MEMS

Figure 2.2 Molecular components of a focal adhesion (3).

Recent research has shown that mechanical interactions that occur at the cell-

extracellular matrix interface are critical in regulating a host of cellular processes. Cell

motility requires that cells generate the necessary forces in order to move.4 Figure 2.3

shows the basic processes involved in cell motility. Protrusions, in the form of filopodia

or lamellapodia are formed at the lead edge of the cell. These areas are rich in highly

dynamic actin filaments. Contractile forces are created in the cytoskeleton. Focal

adhesions at the trailing edge of the cell are released, thus propelling the cell in the

direction toward the leading edge.

35

Page 57: Polymer MEMS

Figure 2.3 Cell motility process (2).

Intracellular tension, force transduction across the cell membrane, and associated

processes such as cell shape and spreading have been show to affect a number of other

cellular processes in addition to cell motility.5,6 A number of interesting experiments have

been performed to illustrate this point. By applying mechanical stress directly to integrin

receptors via magnetic twisting, Wang et. al7 demonstrated assembly of focal adhesions

and stiffening of the cytoskeleton proportional to the applied stress. These experiments

are evidence that the integrins are directly involved in transmitting forces between the

cytoskeleton and the extracellular matrix. By chemically inhibiting actin filament,

microtubule, and intermediate filament function independently, they also showed that all

three elements of the cytoskeleton are involved in the mechanical signal transduction

process. Chen et al. used micropatterned cell adhesion molecules to control the degree of

cell spreading in bovine and human endothelial cells. These experiments showed that

restricting the cells ability to spread induced apoptosis.8 This work demonstrated that

cells have the ability to use geometrical factors as regulatory cues to determine cell fate.

Chrzanowska-Wodnicka and Burridge9 showed that rhoA, a GTP binding protein,

36

Page 58: Polymer MEMS

increases cell contractility corresponding to the formation of focal adhesions and stress

fibers in fibroblast cell. These experiments are just a sampling of the evidence for the bi-

directional link between mechanical and biochemical processes in cells. Several review

and commentary articles are available with more information on the theory and

experimental evidence of the role of cell and cytoskeletal mechanics in regulating cell

function.5,6,10-12

2.2.3 The cytoskeleton and disease

In addition to normal cell function, a number of pathologies have a direct effect

on cytoskeletal function. A prime example is the case of metastatic cancers. Metastasis is

largely dependant on the cells ability to migrate from one location to another. As

demonstrated previously, the process of cell motility is largely dependant on cytoskeletal

dynamics. In a number of cancers, the regulatory mechanisms that control the

cytoskeleton do not function properly. In some cases, direct mutations of cytoskeletal

actin have been observed. In other cases, mutation or overexpression of regulatory

proteins such as members of the WASP family of proteins or Rho GTPases could be

responsible for changes in cytoskeletal function.13,14

The cytoskeleton is directly related to a number of other diseases.15 Mutations in

keratin intermediate filaments in epithelial cells are responsible for a range of skin

disorders.16,17 These disorders are often characterized by fragile skin and blistering. This

illustrates the important role of intermediate filament in maintaining the structural

integrity of cells under stress. Keratin intermediate filaments have also been implicated in

various liver pathologies and could be a factor in intestinal disease.18,19 A lack of the actin

37

Page 59: Polymer MEMS

regulatory protein WASP has been implicated in the immune disorder Wiskott-Aldrich

syndrome.20

2.2.4 Drugs and cell mechanics

Given the number of pathologies associated with the cytoskeleton, it is no surprise

that drugs have been developed to target specific cytoskeletal components. Various

chemotherapeutic agents with cytoskeletal targets have been explored. Primarily these

drugs have targeted the microtubules due to their important role in cell division.

Paclitaxel (Taxol®) is now commonly used to treat various cancers including lung,

ovarian, and breast cancer. Paclitaxel stabilizes microtubules to hinder cell mitosis.21-22

Vinca alkaloids23 and colchicine24 also target microtubules and inhibit depolymerization

to reduce cell proliferation. Vinca alkaloids are used widely used as chemotherapeutics

and colchicine has been explored as an anti-cancer drug as well as being used as a

treatment for gout. Cucurbinacin E has shown anti-proliferative effects in prostate cancer

cells and been shown to induce significant disruption of the actin cytoskeleton.25

38

Several other chemicals, while not necessarily being actively explored for

therapeutic applications, still have a significant influence on the cytoskeleton and have

been indispensable in studying cytoskeletal behavior. Cytochalsins are a group of fungal

derived toxins that interfere with actin polymerization primarily by binding the barbed

end of actin filaments and decreasing the amount of monomeric actin in the cell.26

Cytochalasins, especially cytochalasin D, have been widely used to study the role of actin

in various cellular processes. Phalliodin is another fungal toxin with a significantly

different effect on actin. Phalloidin inhibits depolymerization of actin filaments.

Phalloidin binds strongly to actin filaments and much less to monomeric actin. This shifts

Page 60: Polymer MEMS

the equilibrium between F-actin filaments and monomeric G-actin toward the formation

of filaments.26 Jasplakinolide, a toxin derived from marine sponges, has been shown to

induce actin polymerization in vitro27, though some in vivo observations are less straight

forward.28

2.3 Measuring cell mechanics

A wide array of different techniques and experimental methods have been

developed to study cell mechanics. For the purposes of this discussion, the techniques

will be broadly grouped to three types of experimental methods: (1) applying forces to

cells, (2) measuring the mechanical properties of cells, and (3) measuring forces

generated by cells. Each of these is important in its own right and considerable crossover

exists between these methods with regards to their importance in understanding cell

behavior.

2.3.1 Appling forces to cells

Several methods have been developed to deliver different types of mechanical

stimuli to various cell types. Externally applied shear stress is an important regulatory cue

for many cell types, especially endothelial cells. Shear stress has been shown in induce

cytoskeletal remodeling, changes cell morphology and orientation, and affect biological

function in endothelial cells.29-31 One of the most common methods to study shear

induced endothelial cell response is using a parallel plate flow through systems. This is a

simple method for controlling shear stress on cells by controlling the flow rate through a

chamber with fixed dimensions. The other commonly used method is the cone plate

system. This method uses a rotating cone and a fixed plate to create a controlled shear

39

Page 61: Polymer MEMS

stress. These studies have been critical in understanding mechanotransduction pathways

as well as understanding the specific shear stress induced changes to biochemical

processes within endothelial cells. Mechanical forces have also been applied to cells

using substrate deformation techniques.32,33 For these experiments, a flexible substrate is

mechanically deformed by applying uniaxial tension, biaxial tension, bending, or a range

of other mechanical loading conditions. These experiments have been used to study

muscle, bone, cartilage, and a variety of other relevant cells.

2.3.2 Measuring the mechanical properties of cells

Another active area of cell mechanics involves measuring the mechanical

properties of cells and cellular components. Measurements have been carried out on

whole cells or on specific regions of the cells. Given that the cytoskeleton is largely

responsible for maintaining the structural integrity to the cell, there is a direct link

between the elastic properties of the cell and cytoskeletal mechanics. One of the most

commonly used tools to study cellular and subcellular mechanical properties is atomic

force microscopy (AFM). AFM has been used to create elasticity maps to evaluate the

local mechanical properties of several different cell types.34 These studies have been used

to show variations in the elastic properties of a cell depending on location. These

techniques has also been used to evaluate the effects of different chemicals on the

mechanical properties cells.35 A significant decrease was observed in the elastic modulus

of cells after exposure to actin disrupting agents (e.g. cytochalasins, jasplakinolide) at

sufficient concentrations, but no significant changes to the elastic properties were

observed in response to microtubule targeting agents (e.g. cholcicine, taxol).

40

Page 62: Polymer MEMS

Other methods for measuring the mechanical properties of whole cells include

micropipette aspiration and optical tweezers.36 In the case of micropipette aspiration, a tip

with an inside diameter smaller than the cell is used and a known pressure is applied to

pull the cell into the pipette tip. The deformation of the cell is observed in a microscopy

and the elastic and viscous properties of the cell can be calculated.37 Optical tweezers use

laser light to apply a known force to a bead. By attaching the bead to a cell, the cell can

be deformed and the force and deformation information can be used to calculate the

mechanical properties. Optical tweezers have very good force resolution (~1 pN), but a

limited range of force (~ 600 pN). Higher forces require higher laser power and local

heating can damage the cell. This technique has primarily been applied to study of red

blood cells38 and biomolecules.39

2.3.3 Measuring forces generated by cells

41

Some of the seminal work studying forces at the cell-surface interface was done

by Harris et al.40 who grew cells on cross-linked silicone rubber substrates and observed

the wrinkling of the polymer film. One limitation with this method is the difficulty in

quantifying the forces. Since this initial work, improved methods have been developed

that incorporate fluorescent microbeads into polyacrylamide gels.41 The displacement of

the beads and the stiffness of the gel are used to calculate forces exerted by the cell. This

method is commonly referred to as traction force microscopy.42 While calculation of the

forces is still not straightforward, this process does allow quantification of spatially

resolved forces applied to the substrate. Figure 2.3 shows (a) the bead displacement

vectors overlaid on a phase contrast image of the cell and (b) a corresponding color-

coded traction stress map for a NIH 3T3 fibroblast.

Page 63: Polymer MEMS

Figure 2.4 Traction force microscopy for measuring fibroblast forces; (a) Displacement vector field overlaid on a phase contrast image of the cell and (b) corresponding stress

map.

Some interesting work has been done looking at the effects of substrate

mechanical properties on cell behavior. Pelham and Wang43 used polyacrylamide gels

with a range of stiffness to show that the formation of focal adhesions and motility of

epithelial (normal rat kidney) and fibroblasts (3T3) cells is dependant on the stiffness of

the substrate. Lo et al.44 took this work a step further and showed that 3T3 cells

preferentially migrate from the softer regions to the stiffer regions of the substrate. Cells

also responded to locally induced stresses created with a microneedle and migrated

42

Page 64: Polymer MEMS

toward the regions of higher tension and away from region of compression. They used

particle tracking methods to measure the forces generated by the cells, and showed that

the forces generated by cells on the stiffer substrates were higher than that on the softer

materials. These experiments demonstrate several important issues. First, the cells sense

the mechanical properties of their surroundings and response accordingly. This work also

demonstrates a link between substrate and cytoskeletal mechanics given that the forces

exerted on the soft materials were less that those on the stiffer material.

2.3.4 BioMEMS for measuring cell forces

Several bioMEMS devices, both silicon and polymer, have been developed for

measuring cell mechanics. Figure 2.4 shows an SEM micrograph of a silicon MEMS

heart cell force transducer.45 The device consists of a clamp to hold the cell in place. The

clamp is connected to a set of thin polysilion beams that are then attached via a slider

restraint to the substrate. The heart cell is attached to the clamp using silicone sealant

When the cell is stimulated to contract (by varying [Ca2+]), the polysilicon beams are

bent toward the center of the device. By measuring the magnitude of the displacement,

the force can be calculated. While this device clearly demonstrates measurement of

mechanical forces generated by cells, it is designed to measure the relatively large forces

generated by cardiomyocytes. The general measurement methodology, namely using

cantilever beam deflection to measure cell forces, can be applied more broadly.

43

Page 65: Polymer MEMS

Figure 2.5 Polysilicon heart cell force sensor (45).

Galbraith and Sheetz developed a silicon-based cantilever device for measuring

fibroblast cell forces.46 The device consists of an array of single cantilever beams with a

pad at the end of each beam as shown in Figure 2.5. When the cell attaches to the pad and

exerts a force, the cantilever is bent proportional to the applied load. Using this device,

they were able to measure traction forces exerted by fibroblasts at various locations on

the cell (i.e. lead edge, nucleus, and trailing edge) to determine the spatial distribution of

cell forces. They were also able to measure the time varying force. One disadvantage of

this device is that deflection of the beam can only be measured in the direction

orthogonal to the cantilever direction. The force had to be calculated by making the

assumption that all of the force was oriented in the direction of the long axis of the cell

(i.e. the direction of movement).

44

Page 66: Polymer MEMS

Figure 2.6 Silicon-based cantilever force sensor for measuring fibroblast traction forces (46).

Figure 2.7 PDMS device for measuring fibroblast contractile forces. The image shows the PDMS pillars and the cell with the force vector for each pillar (47).

45

Page 67: Polymer MEMS

More recently, microfabricated polymer structures have been developed for

measuring cell forces.47 The device in Figure 2.6 shows an array of PDMS micropillars

that act as vertical cantilevers. When the cell attaches to the pillars and exerts a force, the

pillars are deflected. Using the stiffness of the pillar and the deflection, the force exerted

on each PDMS pillar was calculated. They were able to measure the time dependence of

the force and by micropatterning adhesion molecules on the surface of the pillars, they

showed that the force per pillar is proportional to the amount of cell spreading.

2.4 Conclusion

Cell mechanics plays a critical role in regulating cell function. Mechanical

processes are involved in cell adhesion, movement, signal transduction, and even play a

role regulating cell death. Studying the cytoskeleton both from a biochemical and

mechanical perspective has led to a greater understanding of cell mechanics and

mechanotransduction. A variety of measurement devices and methods have been

developed to investigate these processes. Continued work in this area will lead to a more

complete understanding of cell mechanics and how these factors play a larger role in

maintaining normal tissue function. Another critical area is understanding the role of cell

mechanics in disease and using this information to develop and test drugs and new

therapeutic approaches.

References 1 A.W. Orr, B.P. Helmke, B.R. Blackman, M.A. Schwartz, “Mechanisms of mechanotransduction.” Developmental Cell 10 (2006) 11-20. 2 M.R.K. Mofrad, R.D. Kamm (eds.), Cytoskeletal Mechanics, Cambridge University Press, Cambridge (2006). 46

Page 68: Polymer MEMS

3 A. Nicolas, B. Geiger, S.A. Safran, “Cell mechanosensitivity control the anisotropy of focal adhesions.” Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences USA 101 (2004) 12520-12525. 4 M.P. Sheetz, D.P. Felsenfeld, C.G. Galbraith, “Cell migration: regulation of force on extracellular matrix-integrin complexes.” Trends in Cell Biology 8 (1998) 51-54. 5 M.E. Chicurel, C.S. Chen, D.E. Ingber, “Cellular control lies in the balance of forces.” Current Opinions in Cell Biology 10 (1998) 232-239. 6 C.G. Galbraith, M.P. Sheetz, “Forces on adhesive contacts affect cell function.” Current Opinions in Cell Biology 10 (1998) 566-571. 7 N. Wang, J.T. Butler, D.E. Ingber, “Mechanotransduction across the cell surface and through the cytoskeleton.” Science 260 (1993) 1124-1127. 8 C.S. Chen, M. Mrksich, S. Huang, G.M. Whitesides, D.E. Ingber, “Geometric control of cell life and death.” Science 276 (1997) 1425-1428. 9 M. Chrzanowska-Wodnicke, K. Burridge, “Rho-stimulated contractility drive the formation of stress fibers and focal adhesions.” Journal of Cell Biology 133 (1996) 1403-1415. 10 D.E. Ingber, “Cellular tensegrity revisited I: Cell structure and hierarchical systems biology.” Journal of Cell Science 116 (2003) 1157-1173. 11 D.E. Ingber, “Tensiegrity II. How structural networks influence cellular information processing networks.” Journal of Cell Science 116 (2003) 1397-1408. 12 G. Bao, S. Suresh, “Cell and molecular mechanics of biological materials.” Nature Materials 2 (2003) 715-725. 13 A.E. Cress, R.B. Nagle (eds.), Cell Adhesion and Cytoskeletal Molecules in Metastasis, Springer, Dordrecht, The Netherlands (2006). 14 H. Yamaguchi, J. Condeelis, “Regulation of the actin cytoskeleton in cancer cell migration and invasion.” Biochimica et Beophysica Acta 1773 (2007) 642-652. 15 F.C.S. Ramaekers, F.T. Bosman, “The cytoskeleton and disease.” Journal of Pathology 204 (2004) 351-354. 16 E.B. Lane, W.H.I. McLean, “Keratins and skin disorders.” Journal of Pathology 204 (2004) 355-366.

47

Page 69: Polymer MEMS

17 E. Fuchs, “The cytoskeleton and disease: genetic disorder of intermediate filaments.” Annual Review of Genetics 30 (1996) 197-231. 18 K. Zatloukal, C. Stumptner, A. Fuchsbichler, P. Fickert, C. Lackner, M. Trauner, H. Denk, “The keratin cytoskeleton in liver disease.” Journal of Pathology 204 (2004) 367-376.

19 D.W. Owens. E.B. Lane, “Keratin mutations and intestinal pathology.”Journal of Pathology204 (2004) 377-385.

20 Y. Calle, H.-C. Chou, A.J. Thrasher, G.E. Jones. “Wiskott-Aldrich syndrome protein and the cytoskeletal dynamics of dendritic cells.” Journal of Pathology 204 (2004) 460-469.

21 P.B. Schiff, S.B. Horwitz, “Taxol stabilizes microtubules in mouse fibroblast cells.” Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences USA 77 (1980) 1561-1565. 22 M.V. Blagosklonny, T. Fojo, “Molecular effect of Paclitaxel: myths and reality.” International Journal of Cancer 83 (1999) 151-156. 23 V.K. Ngan, K. Bellman, B.T. Hill, L. Wilson, M.A. Jordan, “Mechanism of mitotic block and inhibition of cell proliferation by the semisynthetic vinca alkaloids vinorelbine and its newer derivative vinflunine.” Molecular Pharmacology 60 (2001) 225-232. 24 G.G. Borisy, E.W. Taylor, “The mechanism of action of colchicines.” The Journal of Cell Biology 34 (1967) 525-533. 25 K.L.K. Duncan, M.D. Duncan, M.C. Ally, E.A. Sausville, “Cucurbitacin E-induced disruption of the actin and vimentin cytoskeleton in prostate carcinoma cells.” Biochemical Pharmacology 52 (1996) 1553-1560. 26 J.A. Cooper, “Effects of cytochalasin and phalloidin on actin.” The Journal of Cell Biology 105 (1987) 1473-1478. 27 M.R. Bubb, A.M.J. Senderowiczf, E.A. Sausville, K.L.K. Duncan, E.D. Kern, “Jasplakinolide, a cytotoxic natural product, induces actin polymerization and competitively inhibits the binding of phalloidin to F-actin.” The Journal of Biological Chemistry 269 (1994) 14869-14871. 28 M.R. Bubb, I. Spector, B.B. Beyer, K.M. Fosen, “Effects of Jasplakinolide on the kinetics of actin polymerization.” The Journal of Biological Chemistry 275 (2000) 5163-5170.

48

Page 70: Polymer MEMS

29 T. Ohashi, M. Sato, “Remodeling of vascular endothelial cells exposed to fluid shear stress: experimental and numerical approach.” Fluid Dynamics Research 37 (2005) 40-59. 30 O. Traub, B.C. Berk, “Laminar shear stress: mechanicsms by which endothelial cells transduce an atheroprotective force.” Arteriosclerosis, Thrombosis, and Vascular Biology 18 (1998) 677-685. 31 C.R. White, J.A. Frangos, “The shear stress of it all: the cell membrane and mechanochemical tranduction.” Philosophical Transactions of the Royal Society B 362 (2007) 1459-1467. 32 K.J. Van Vliet, G. Bao, S. Suresh, “The biomechanics toolbox: experimental approaches for living cells and biomolecules.” Acta Materialia 51 (2003) 5881-5905. 33 T.D. Brown, “Techniques for mechanical stimulation of cell in vitro: a review.” Journal of Biomechanics 33 (2000) 3-14. 34 T.G. Kuznetsova, M.N. Starodubtseva, N.I. Yegorenkov, S.A. Chizhik, R.I. Zhdanov. “Atomic force microscopy probing of cell elasticity.” Micron 38 (2007) 824-833. 35 C. Rotsch, M. Radmacher, “Drug-induced changes of cytoskeletal structure and mechanics in fibroblasts: an atomic force microscopy study.” Biophysical Journal 78 (2000) 520-535. 36 M.R.K. Mofrad, R.D. Kamm (eds.), Cytoskeletal Mechanics: Models and Measurements, Cambridge University Press, Cambridge (2006). 37 R.M. Hochmuth, “Micropipette aspiration of living cells.” Journal of Biomechanics 33 (2000) 15-22. 38 M. Dao, C.T. Lim, S. Suresh, “Mechanics of the human red blood cell deformed by optical tweezers.” Journal of the Mechanics and Physics of Solids 51 (2003) 2259-2280. 39 A.D. Mehta, M. Rief, J.A. Spudich, D.A. Smith, R.M. Simmons, “Single-molecule biomechanics with optical methods.” Science 283 (1999) 1689-1695. 40 A.K. Harris, P. Wild, D. Stopak, “Silicone rubber substrata: a new wrinkle in the study of cell locomotion.” Science 208 (1980) 177-179. 41 M. Dembo, Y.-L. Wang, “Stresses at the cell-to-substrate interface during locomotion of fibroblasts.” Biophysical Journal 76 (1999) 2307-2316. 42 S. Munevar, Y.-L Wang, M. Dembo, “Traction force microscopy of migrating normal and H-ras transformed 3T3 fibroblasts.” Biophysical Journal 80 (2001), 1744-1757.

49

Page 71: Polymer MEMS

43 R.J. Pelham, Y.-L. Wang, “Cell locomotion and focal adhesions are regulated by substrate flexibility.” Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences USA 94 (1997) 13661-13665. 44 C.-M. Lo, H.-B. Wang, M. Dembo, Y.-L. Wang, “Cell movement is guided by the rigidity of the substrate.” Biophysical Journal 79 (2000) 144-152. 45 G. Lin, K.SJ. Pister, K.P. Roos, “Surface micromachined polysilicon heart cell force transducer.” Journal of Microelectromechanical Systems 9 (2000) 9-17. 46 C.B. Galbraith, M.P. Sheetz, “A micromachined device provides a new bend on fibroblast traction forces.” Proceeding of the National Academy of Sciences USA 94 (1997) 9114-9118. 47 J.L. Tan, J. Tien, D.M. Pirone, D.S. Gray, K. Bhadriraju, C.S. Chen, “Cells lying on a bed of microneedles: An approach to isolate mechanical force.” Proceeding of the National Academy of Sciences USA 100 (1993), 1484-1489.

50

Page 72: Polymer MEMS

CHAPTER 3

FABRICATION OF POLYMER MICROSTRUCTURES BY DOUBLE STAMP MICROMOLDING

3.1 Introduction

Micromolding techniques are now widely used for fabrication of microscale

polymer components. Hot embossing1 and injection molding2 have been scaled down

from their use in macroscale polymer processing to accommodate microscale fabrication.

Several of the soft lithography based techniques also allow fabrication of polymer

microstructures. Of particular interest to this work is the process of microtransfer

molding. Microtransfer molding was introduced by Whitesides et al.3 in 1996. Since then,

the process has been used for fabricating micro and nanoscale devices including

waveguides,4 Schottky diodes,5 and magnetic separation devices.6

The process of microtransfer molding is shown in Figure 3.1. A polymer solution

is applied to the surface of a micropatterned PDMS mold. The mold is then placed in

contact with a substrate and the polymer solution is cured and the mold is removed. This

process provides a simple and cost effective method to replicate microfeatures over large

areas. One limitation of this technique is the residual film that remains between the

polymer features after the mold is removed. This film can be removed by additional

51

Page 73: Polymer MEMS

processing such as oxygen plasma treatment, but the process requires specialized

equipment and introduces additional processing costs.

Figure 3.1 Schematic diagram of the microtransfer molding (µTM) process (7).

52

The process of double stamp micromolding is a modified microtransfer molding

process that allows fabrication of individual polymer microstructures without the need for

additional processing steps. The process adapted from work by Guan et al.8,9 A solution

of a thermoplastic polymer is spin coated onto the surface of a PDMS mold. An initial

stamping process with low pressure is used to remove the polymer material from the

raised portions of the PDMS mold. A higher pressure stamping step is then used to

remove the material from the recessed portions of the mold. The double stamp

micromolding process is described in detail here, and the process is characterized with

respect to the morphology of the features as a function of the polymer solution

concentration and the transfer pressure.

Page 74: Polymer MEMS

3.2 Materials and Methods

3.2.1 Double stamp micromolding process

Polystyrene was used as the model polymer is this study, but several other

thermoplastic polymers have been patterned using minor variations of the same basic

process. Other polymers that have been tested include poly(methyl methacrylate)

(PMMA), poly(propyl methacrylate) (PPMA), polycaprolactone (PCL), and poly(lactic-

co-glycolic) acid (PLGA). The process is also flexible with respect to the substrate that

can be used for pattern transfer. Rigid substrates such as silicon and glass as well as

flexible substrates (polyimide and polycarbonate) have been used.

The double stamp micromolding process was performed as described in Figure

3.2. The PDMS mold was spin coated with a polymer solution as shown in Figure 3.2 (b).

The polymer on the surface of the mold is then removed using higher temperature and

lower pressure. In the case of polystyrene, the temperature for the first stamp was 200 ºC

and the pressure was ~2.5 psi. The polymer that remained in the recess features of the

mold was then transferred to the substrate using lower temperature and higher pressure.

The lower temperature of the second stamping was needed to maintain the resolution of

the features and higher pressure was used to ensure that the polymer in the recesses of the

mold made contact with the substrate during the transfer. A transfer temperature of 125

ºC and transfer pressures between 30 and 200 psi were used in the second stamping. The

stamping was performed at varying polymer solution concentrations and pressures to

determine if the coating condition or the transfer conditions have a more significant effect

on the outcome of the feature morphology.

53

Page 75: Polymer MEMS

Figure 3.2 Schematic diagram of the double stamp micromolding process. (a) uncoated PDMS mold, (b) mold spin coated with polymer, (c) inverted mold in contact with heated

glass to remove surface polymer, (d) polymer removed from the raised portions of the mold, (e) selectively coated mold, (f) inverted mold in brought into contact with the

substrate with heat and pressure, (g) polymer structures after transfer to the substrate.

3.2.2 Process characterization

Two different PDMS mold geometries were used to characterize the process. For

SEM and optical characterization, a 5.3 µm deep mold with 5 µm wide channels and 45

µm spacing between channels was used. The mold was spin coated with 3, 5, 7.5, and

10% (wt/wt) solutions of polystyrene in anisole. The solutions were spin coated onto the

mold at 3000 rpm. Optical micrographs were taken to examine the film prior to

stamping. For relatively low polymer concentrations, dewetting of the polymer is

observed on the mold. The dewetting process and its utility in microfabrication will be

54

Page 76: Polymer MEMS

discussed in detail in Chapter 4. SEM micrographs were taken of the mold at several

steps in the process. Images were taken of the empty mold prior to spin coating, the mold

after spin coating with a 7.5% solution of PS, the mold after the first stamping to remove

the surface materials, and the substrate after stamping the PS features.

For AFM characterization, a 5.3 µm deep mold could not be used due to the

limited z-range of the AFM. Instead, a 3.3 µm deep mold with 5 µm wide channels and 5

µm spacing was used. AFM scans were run to determine the morphology of the final

feature cross section at a given polymer concentration. The features were characterized

using tapping mode atomic force microscopy (AFM) with a 300 kHz tip, scan length of

25 µm, and scan rate of 0.5 Hz. We define the distortion of the feature according to the

sag, or the depression created in the center of the feature during pattern transfer. The

sagging was characterized using the equation 1:

100max

minmax ×−

=H

HHS (1)

where S is defined as the percent sag, Hmax is the maximum height of the feature cross

section, and Hmin is the minimum height of the cross section.

3.3 Results and discussion

Figure 3.3 shows the dewetting of the PS on the PDMS mold at concentrations of

1%, 3%, 5%, 7.5%, and 10%. The images show that at 1% the polymer dewets and

partially fills the channels in the mold. In addition, a line of polymer forms on the raised

features of the mold. As the concentration increases, the wetting of the channels

increases while the dewetted line on the raised features become wider. At 5% a small

discontinuity exist between the PS in the features and that on the raised portions of the

55

Page 77: Polymer MEMS

mold. At 7.5% no dewetting occurs (i.e. the polymer film is continuous). Despite the

fact that no dewetting occurs, the double stamping process can still be performed. In fact,

the yield and feature morphology are more favorable at 7.5% than at any other

concentration. The process can also be done with a 10% solution, however, the yield

decreases significantly due to removal of material within the channels during the first

stamping. At even higher polymer concentrations, the thickness of the film is such that

the entire film is removed during the first stamp. This is an effective method for making

continuous films of microstructures.

Figure 3.3 Optical micrographs of polystyrene at (a) 1%, (b) 3%, (c) 5%, (d) 7.5%, and (e) 10% PS concentration (wt/wt) in anisole.

Scanning electron micrographs of several steps in the process are shown in Figure

3.4. The empty PDMS mold is shown in (a). Figure 3.4 (b) shows the PDMS mold after

spin coating with a 7.5% solution of PS. The images show that the film is continuous but

56

Page 78: Polymer MEMS

there is a topographical difference in the film on the raised portions of the mold versus

the channels. Figure 3.4 (c) shows the mold after the first stamping with material only in

the recessed channels. Finally, Figure 3.4 (d) shows the features after removal from the

mold. The images show that the features are transferred with little distortion of the

original feature morphology.

Figure 3.4 Scanning electron micrographs of four steps in the double stamp micromolding process; (a) uncoated PDMS mold, (b) mold after spin coating, (c) mold after the first stamping with polymer in the recesses of the mold, (d) polymer features

after transfer to the substrate.

Figure 3.5 shows the sagging of the PS features after the second stamping as a

function of the polymer solution concentration. The plot shows an inverse relationship

between the feature sag and the polymer solution concentration. This is likely caused by

a combination of two factors. First, at low concentration, the features are not filled

57

Page 79: Polymer MEMS

completely. The unoccupied space allows the mold to defect during the transfer process,

leading to distortion of the features. Second, at low polymer concentration the channels

are filled with a more curved profile due to increased retention of material at the wall of

the channel versus in the bulk of the channel. As the concentration increases, these

effects become less prevalent and the channels fill more completely and more uniformly.

Figure 3.6 shows the effect of the transfer pressure on sag of the features for a

7.5% solution spin coated at 3000 rpm. The figure shows that there is a much less

significant effect on the polymer features as the pressure is increased and no trend in the

sag is observed with increased pressure. This indicates that the choice of polymer

solution concentration has a much more significant impact on the feature morphology

than transfer pressure used to remove the features from the mold. All scans were

performed in triplicate and the error bars are ± the standard deviation.

58

Page 80: Polymer MEMS

0

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

40

45

50

0 2 4 6 8 10

Polymer Concentration (%)

% S

ag

12

3%

5%

7.5%

10%

Figure 3.5 Plot of the feature distortion (sag) with increasing polymer concentration; the insets show cross sectional AFM scans at each of the four polymer concentrations tested.

0

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

40

45

50

0 50 100 150 200 250

Pressure (psi)

% S

ag

Figure 3.6 Plot of the feature distortion (sag) with increasing pressure; a 7.5% PS solution spin coated at 3000 rpm was used to fabricate the structures.

59

Page 81: Polymer MEMS

3.4 Conclusion

SEM, AFM and optical microscopy were used to characterize the double

stamping of PS lines. The double stamping process can be used due to topographical

differences between the polymer on the raised portions of the mold and polymer in mold

recesses. As polymer concentration is further increased, a lower yield of polymer

features is obtained due to removal of polymer from the channels during the first

stamping process. The results also show that the polymer fills the mold in a predictable

manner with increased filling of the features as the polymer solution concentration is

increased. The transfer pressure used to remove the materials from the mold has much

less effect on the overall feature morphology.

This work shows that the double stamping process can be used to fabricate high

quality polymer microfeatures. Characterization of the process is critical for obtaining

high yield features with quality retention of the original feature morphology.

References 1 H. Becker, U. Heim, Sensors and Actuators A: Physical 83, 130 (2000). 2 L.J. Lee, M.J. Madou, K.W. Koelling, S. Daunert, S. Lai, C.G. Koh, Biomedical Microdevices 3, 339 (2001). 3 X.-M. Zhoa, Y. Xia, and G.M. Whitesides, “Fabrication of three-dimensional micro-structures: microtransfer molding.” Advanced Materials 8 (1996) 837-840. 4 X.-M. Zhao, S.P. Smith, S.J. Waldman, G.M. Whitesides, M. Prentiss, “Demonstration of waveguide couplers fabricated using microtrasnfer molding.” Applied Physics Letters 71 (1997) 1017-1019. 5 J. Hu, T. Deng. R.G. Beck, R.M. Westervelt, G.M. Whitesides, Sensors and Actuators A: Physical 75, 65-69 (1999). 6 T. Deng, M. Prentiss, G.M. Whitesides, Applied Physics Letters 80, 461-463 (2002).

60

Page 82: Polymer MEMS

7 Y. Xia, G.M. Whitesides, “Soft lithography.” Annual Review of Materials Science 28 (1998) 153-184. 8 J. Guan, A. Chakrapani, D.J. Hansford, “Polymer microparticles fabricated by soft lithography.” Chemistry of Materials 17 (2005) 6227-6229. 9 J. Guan, N. Ferrell, L.J. Lee, D.J. Hansford, “Fabrication of polymeric microparticles for drug delivery by soft lithography.” Biomaterials 27 (2006) 4034-4041.

61

Page 83: Polymer MEMS

CHAPTER 4

SPIN DEWETTING OF POLYMERS ON POLYDIMETHYLSILOXANE (PDMS) MOLDS

4.1 Introduction

Dewetting is a process of spatial separation of a material caused by physically,

chemically, or thermally induced instability in a thin solid or liquid film. Dewetting is a

phenomenon that has been well documented in thin polymer films.1,2 In most cases, this

is an undesirable effect that results in formation of holes in polymer films. However,

researchers have begun to exploit this process to engineer surfaces that elicit a desired

dewetting behavior for creating regularly structured polymer features. Primarily, this has

been achieved by locally altering the chemical composition of the surface of interest.3-6

Dewetting of thin polymer films on chemically heterogeneous surfaces has been

studied both theoretically and experimentally. The theory of polymer dewetting on

chemically non-uniform surfaces has been described by Lenz et al.7 and Konnur et al.8

Microscale differences in the wettability of the substrate lead to instabilities in the film,

which in turn leads to formation of a pattern. Experimentally, microcontact printing has

been used for inducing specific dewetting behavior. By printing hydrophilic chemistries

on hydrophobic substrates, a hydrophobic polymer such as polystyrene will preferentially

62

Page 84: Polymer MEMS

coat the hydrophobic regions of the substrate, thus creating a pattern.3,4 A similar concept

applies to printing of hydrophobic chemistries on hydrophilic substrates.5,6

In addition to chemically induced dewetting, surface topography is also known to

be a factor in the dewetting process. The effects of physical, chemical, and

physiochemical heterogeneities have been studied theoretically by Konnur et al.9 Their

model for physical dewetting was based on a sinusoidally rough surface and predicted

polymer dewetting in the depressions of the rough surface. In contrast to chemically

induced dewetting, physically induced dewetting is dominated by dynamic interactions

between the polymer solution and the topographically modified surface.

Bao et al.10 used a combination of chemical patterning and topography for

fabricating micro and nanoscale poly(methyl methacrylate) (PMMA) and polycarbonate

(PC) features. They coated a topographically patterned SiO2 surface with a higher

surface energy silane on the raised surfaces and a lower surface energy silane on the

recessed surfaces. During spin coating, PMMA and PC coated the higher surface energy

areas. The polymer features were then removed from the raised features using heat and

pressure.

Here we study the process of spin dewetting on topographically patterned PDMS

molds. This combination of soft lithography and physically controlled dewetting allows

fabrication of polymer microfeatures in both thin (<100 nm) and thick (>5 micron)

polymer films without the need for chemical surface modifications. By spin coating a

topographically patterned mold with a polymer solution with the appropriate solvent and

polymer content, micro and nanoscale polymer features can be fabricated in a single spin

coating process. The spin coating process provides well-controlled coating conditions for

63

Page 85: Polymer MEMS

patterning of microscale features over a large pattern area (> 5 cm2). While patterning of

nanoscale features is less reliable over a large area, the same process shows promise for

nanoscale fabrication as well. The lower reliability of replicating nanoscale features is

likely due to inconsistencies in the original e-beam fabricated master and due to a

relatively small original pattern area.

The spin dewetting process allows fabrication of features with either the same or

different geometrical properties as the original mold depending on the polymer

concentration used. Several levels of dewetting can be observed by altering polymer

solution concentration. Complete dewetting takes place at relatively low polymer

concentrations, and refers to the complete lack of polymer solution on the raised features

of the PDMS molds. For complete dewetting, the polymer remains only in the recessed

feature after the spin coating process. Partial dewetting occurs at higher polymer

concentrations. In partial dewetting, the polymer separates during the spin process,

resulting in filling of the recessed portions of the mold in addition to a second, physically

separated polymer pattern that remains on the raised features of the mold. At even higher

polymer concentrations, a continuous polymer film is formed on the PDMS mold.

Spin dewetting allows precise fabrication of polymer structures at the micro and

nanoscale with a single spin process. The dewetting process is initiated purely by surface

topography, thus no chemical surface modifications are needed. This process could be

applied to a number of applications as a simple method for fabricating physically

independent polymer structures at the micro and nanoscale.

64

Page 86: Polymer MEMS

4.2 Materials and methods

4.2.1 Materials

Poly (n-propyl methacrylate) (PPMA, MW ~150,000) (Scientific Polymer

Products), poly(methyl methacrylate) (PMMA, MW ~75,000) (Scientific Polymer

Products), and polystyrene (PS, melt flow index 4.0) (Aldrich) were used as model

polymers. Polymers were dissolved in anisole (Sigma) at concentrations ranging from

0.125% to 20% (wt/wt). From here on, all solution concentrations are given as weight

percent

4.2.2 PDMS molding

PDMS molds were fabricated using standard soft lithography procedures

described previously. Silicon wafer masters were fabricated from three different

photoresists depending on the desired mold geometry and thickness. The photoresists

used in this study were S1813 positive tone resist (Shipley), SPR 220-7 positive tone

resist (Shipley) and SU8 2005 negative tone resist (Microchem Corp.). Nanoscale

structures were fabricated using electron beam (e-beam) lithography. Silastic T-2

poly(dimethylsiloxane) (PDMS) (Dow Corning) was mixed at a 10:1 ratio with T-2

curing agent and poured over the patterned wafers. The molds were cured at room

temperature for 48 hours before removal from the wafer.

4.2.3 Spin dewetting and pattern transfer

The spin dewetting process is illustrated schematically in Figure 4.1. The PDMS

mold was spin coated with a polymer solution at 3000 or 4000 rpm for 60 seconds. Spin

speed and time were held constant for a given mold geometry to determine the effect of

the pattern geometry and solution concentration on the resultant structures. Depending

65

Page 87: Polymer MEMS

on the concentration of the polymer solution, periodicity of the pattern, and depth of the

pattern, four potential coating scenarios are possible: (1) complete dewetting with

intermediate separation, (2) complete dewetting with no intermediate separation, (3)

partial dewetting, and (4) no dewetting. Complete dewetting with intermediate

separation between features is shown on the far left of Figure 4.1(a). In this case, the

polymer solution dewets into portions of the recessed PDMS structure, while some

recessed areas of the PDMS mold remain uncoated. Complete dewetting with no

intermediate separation occurs when the polymer solution coats the entire recessed

portion of the mold but does not coat any of the raised portions of the mold. For partial

dewetting, the entire recessed portion of the mold is coated and parts of the raise portion

are coated. In this case, there is a physical separation between the polymer within the

recesses of the mold and the polymer coating the raised portions of the mold. Finally, the

case of no dewetting occurs for higher polymer concentrations when the film completely

coats the recessed and raised portions of the mold. Each of these scenarios is illustrated

in a separate column in Figure 4.1(a).

66

Page 88: Polymer MEMS

Figure 4.1 Schematic diagram of the spin dewetting and pattern transfer process; (a) four coating scenarios, (b) pattern transfer, and (c) final pattern.

To remove the polymer structures from the mold, the mold is inverted and heat

and pressure are applied to remove the polymer from the mold onto the desired substrate.

This is illustrated in Figure 4.1(b). For this study, polymer micro- and nanostructures

were transferred onto glass or silicon substrates. The substrates were heated to 95 °C for

PPMA and 170 °C for PMMA and polystyrene. Low pressure (~ 2.5 psi) was used to

remove features from the raised portion of the mold, and higher pressure (~ 30 psi for

S1813 molds and 60 psi for SPR and SU8 molds) was used to remove the features from

the recessed portions of the molds.

As shown in Figure 4.1(c), the resulting structures can have significantly different

geometrical properties from the original mold. This allows features of multiple

geometries to be fabricated from a single PDMS mold by varying polymer

concentrations.

67

Page 89: Polymer MEMS

4.2.4 Process characterization

Resulting micro and nanostructures were characterized using scanning electron

microscopy (SEM) (Hitachi S-3000H), atomic force microscopy (AFM) (Veeco

Dimension 3100), and optical microscopy.

4.3 Results and discussion

Three dimensional AFM images of polystyrene microstructures fabricated using

spin dewetting on 2 µm wide, 1.4 µm tall pillars are shown in Figure 4.2. The spacing

between features is also 2 µm. Polymers solutions were spin coated at 3000 rpm for 60

seconds. The images show the evolution of the feature geometry as the polymer solution

concentration is increased. Figure 4.2(a) shows complete dewetting of a 0.125 wt.-%

polymer solution around the pillars with intermediate separation between the features.

The resulting pattern consists of an array of physically separated polymer rings with 2 µm

holes. At a solution concentration of 1%, the same basic structure is again observed, but

the rings are interconnected with each of the adjacent rings. As the solution

concentration is increased further, the wetting between the features increases until a

continuous film is produced at a solution concentration of 3% [Figure 4.2(c)]. The

pattern is a mesh with 2 µm through holes. The holes were verified by SEM (data not

shown). Between solution concentrations of 3% and 4%, there was a transition from

complete dewetting to no dewetting, and the polymer coated the entire surface of the

PDMS mold. A solid film with 2 µm wells made from a 10 % solution is shown in

Figure 4.2(d).

68

Page 90: Polymer MEMS

Figure 4.2 Three dimensional AFM images and line scans showing the morphological evolution of polystyrene film after removal from the PDMS mold; all scans are 20x20 µm; (a) .125 wt.-%, z-scale is ±100nm, feature height is ~86 nm, (b) 1 wt.-%, z-scale is ±100nm, feature height is ~91 nm, (c) 3 wt.-%, z-scale is ±500nm, feature height is ~290

nm, (d) 10 wt.-%, z-scale is ±1 µm, feature height is ~800 nm.

Dewetting behavior was also studied on a PDMS mold with deeper features. In

this case, 7.5 µm tall circular features fabricated from SPR220-7 were employed.

Solutions of PPMA ranging from 1-20 wt.-% were spin coated at 3000 rpm for 60

69

Page 91: Polymer MEMS

seconds. The coated molds were then characterized using optical microscopy. Evolution

of the film morphology varied slightly from the 2 µm pillars due to the differences in

both the thickness and lateral dimensions of the features. Figure 3(a) shows an uncoated

PDMS mold. Figure 4.3(b-f) shows optical micrographs of spin coated PDMS molds at

increasing polymer concentrations. The images show that for a low polymer

concentration (1%), the polymer only coated the perimeter of the 20 µm pillar and at 3%

the polymer coated the perimeter of the pillar and a portion of the area in between the

pillars. This behavior is similar to that observed on the 2 µm pillars at low polymer

concentrations. Partial dewetting was observed at concentrations of 5-15%. Figure 4.3

shows images of the coated mold at (d) 5% and (e) 15% polymer concentrations. The

recessed features of the mold were coated with a continuous film while particles formed

on the raised features of the mold.

70

Figure 4.3 Optical micrographs of PPMA dewetting on a PDMS mold with 20 µm diameter, 7.5 µm tall pillars; (a) Uncoated PDMS mold (b-f) Polymer solution

concentrations are (b) 1 wt.-% (c) 3 wt.-% (d) 5 wt.-% (e) 15% wt.-% (f) 20 wt.-%.

Page 92: Polymer MEMS

The diameter of the particles formed on the mold can be well controlled by

varying the polymer concentration or the lateral dimension of the features on the mold.

Figure 4.4(a) show that the particle diameter increased linearly from 2.4-3.6 µm with

increased solution concentration. Figure 4.4(b) shows the influence of the lateral

dimension of the mold features on the particle diameter. In this case, hexagonal features

with lateral dimensions between 5 µm and 20 µm were used. The particle size increased

linearly from 2.6-5.4 µm depending on the size of the hexagonal feature that was coated.

The solution concentration is held constant at 15%. The ability to form monodisperse

microparticles using spin dewetting could provide a simple method for production of

microparticles for application such as drug delivery.11,12

71

Page 93: Polymer MEMS

0

0.5

1

1.5

2

2.5

3

3.5

4

4.5

0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16Polymer Solution Concentration (%)

Parti

cle

Size

(µm

)

.

(a)

0123456

5 10 15 20 2Hexagon Size (µm)

Parti

cle

Size

(µm

) .

(b)

5

Figure 4.4 Particle size characterization for (a) varying PPMA solution concentrations on 20 µm diameter PDMS pillars and (b) varying hexagonal pillar sizes with a PMMA

solution concentration of 15%.

Figure 4.5 shows SEM micrographs of each step of the coating and removal

process for a partially dewetted PPMA film on 20 µm PDMS features. Figure 4.5(a) is

the original PDMS mold. Figure 4.5(b) shows the mold after spin coating. The image

shows that the recessed area of the mold is almost completely filled with polymer and

physically separate polymer particles form on top of the pillars. Figure 4.5(c) and (d)

72

Page 94: Polymer MEMS

show the polymer particles that were removed from the top of the pillars using heat and

low pressure and the mesh in between the features removed using heat and higher

pressure.

Figure 4.5 SEM micrographs of each step in the spin coating and stamping process for partially dewetted features; (a) uncoated PDMS mold, (b) mold after spin coating, (c)

substrate with stamped particles, (d) substrate with stamped mesh.

To this point, all of the experiments have described dewetting behavior on pillar

structures. In addition to pillars, dewetting can be initiated in well structures. Figure

4.6(a) shows an SEM micrograph of 3% PMMA spin coated on 10µm diameter circular

wells. The polymer completely dewets and coats only the perimeter of the wells. Figure

4.6(b) shows the polymer rings removed from the wells using the stamping process

described previously.

73

Page 95: Polymer MEMS

Figure 4.6 (a) PDMS mold after spin coating with 3% PMMA, (b) PMMA rings after removal from the mold.

Figure 4.7 SEM micrographs of nanoscale features; (a) no intermediate dewetting between features, (b) intermediate dewetting between features. P represents the primary

features from the mold recesses and I indicates the intermediate dewetted features.

The dewetting process was also demonstrated with nanoscale features. A pattern

was first created using e-beam lithography and the pattern was transferred to PDMS. The

74

Page 96: Polymer MEMS

PDMS mold was then spin coated at 4000 rpm with a 1% polystyrene solution.

Experiments indicate that in addition to the depth of the pattern, the lateral dimensions

and the spacing of the pattern are also important parameters governing dewetting

behavior. Figure 4.7 shows SEM micrographs of polystyrene features after removal from

the mold. For features with smaller lateral dimensions and a smaller center-to-center

distance between features, complete dewetting was observed. For larger features with

larger spacing, only partial dewetting was observed. The features in Figure 7(a and b) are

approximately 170 nm separated by 300 nm and 250 nm separated by 500 nm,

respectively. Note that no residual polymer is observed in (a) and small polystyrene

strips approximately 50 nm wide are located between the features in (b) for the same

polymer concentration.

These results indicate that the original PDMS mold geometry (height, lateral

feature dimensions, and spacing) and polymer solution concentration are all important

factors in the formation of polymer features by spin dewetting. These features can have

significantly different geometries from the original mold. This allows several different

types of polymer features to be fabricated from a single PDMS mold. By properly

engineering the mold surface, complicated polymer structures can be formed and tailored

to a given application.

4.4 Conclusion

75

The process of spin dewetting has potential as a versatile and simple method of

fabricating polymer micro and nanostructures. Three different mold geometries were

studied here. They can be categorized as thin film, thick film, and nanoscale features.

Polystyrene, PMMA, and PPMA were used as model polymers, but the process could

Page 97: Polymer MEMS

potentially be applied to various soluble thermoplastic materials with minor process

modifications. The process was demonstrated on both pillar and well structures.

In this study, the effect of polymer solution concentration and mold feature

geometry on final polymer microstructure was examined. It was found that dewetting

occurs on several different types of patterns at differing polymer concentrations. For a

given mold geometry, the dewetting transitions can be controlled by varying the

concentration of the polymer solution. This results in polymer structures that can have

geometries that are significantly different than the original mold. The process was

applied to fabrication of microscale polymeric patterns and shows potential for

application in polymer nanofabrication.

References 1 R. Günter, “Dewetting of thin polymer films.” Physical Review Letters 68 (1992) 75-78. 2 R. Xie, A. Karim, J.F. Douglas, C.C. Han, R.A. Weiss, “Spinodal dewetting of thin polymer films.” Physical Review Letters 81 (1998) 1251-1254. 3 A. Sehgal, V. Ferreiro, J.F. Douglas, E.J. Amis, A. Karim, “Pattern-directed dewetting of ultrathin polymer films.” Langmuir 18 (2002) 7041-7048. 4 E. Meyer, H. Braun, “Controlled dewetting processes on microstructured surfaces- a new procedure for thin film microstructuring.” Macromolecular Materials and Engineering 276/277 (2000) 44-50. 5 Z. Zhang, Z. Wang, R. Xing, Y. Han, “How to form regular polymer microstructures by surface-patterned-directed dewetting.” Surface Science 539 (2003) 129-136. 6 Z. Zhang, Z. Wang, R. Xing, Y. Han, “Patterning thin polymer films by surface-directed dewetting and pattern transfer.” Polymer 44 (2003) 3737-3743. 7 P. Lenz, R. Lipowsky, “Morphological transitions of wetting layers on structured surfaces.” Physical Review Letters 80 (1998) 1920-1923.

76

8 R. Konnur, K. Kargupta, A. Sharma, “Instability and morphology of thin liquid films on chemically heterogeneous substrates.” Physical Review Letters 84 (2000) 931-934.

Page 98: Polymer MEMS

9 K. Kargupta, A. Sharma, “Dewetting of thin films on periodic physically and chemically patterned surfaces.” Langmuir 18 (2002) 1893-1903. 10 L.-R. Bao, L. Tan, X.D. Huang, Y.P. Kong, L.J. Guo, S.W. Pang, A.F. Yee, “Polymer inking as a micro- and nanopatterning technique.” Journal of Vacuum Science and Technology B 21 (2003) 2749-2754. 11 J. Guan, A. Chakrapani, D.J. Hansford, “Polymer microparticles fabricated by soft lithography.” Chemistry of Materials 17 (2005) 6227-6229. 12 J. Guan, N. Ferrell, L.J. Lee, D.J. Hansford, “Fabrication of polymeric microparticles for drug delivery by soft lithography.” Biomaterials 27 (2006) 4034-4041.

77

Page 99: Polymer MEMS

CHAPTER 5

LIFT-OFF PROCESSING FOR FABRICATING MICROPATTERNED SULFONATED POLYANILINE

5.1 Introduction

Traditional polymeric materials generally have the property of being poor

electrical conductors. However, several unique polymer chemistries have been developed

to act as organic electrical conductors or conducting polymers. Due to their unique

properties, conducting polymers have been considered as potential functional materials in

several applications including biosensors,1,2 light emitting devices,3,4 organic

transistors,5,6 and actuators.7,8

Sulfonated polyaniline (SPAN) is of particular interest due to the advantages of

being self-doped, environmentally stable, and conductive over a wide pH range.9 While

sulfonated polyaniline exhibits considerably higher solubility in aqueous solution than

native polyaniline,10 solution based processing can still be problematic in certain

applications. In situ polymerization of polyaniline on surfaces has been a common route

for formation of polyaniline films on flat surfaces.11,12 This method eliminates the need to

dissolve the polymer after synthesis. In addition to flat films, in situ polymerization may

provide a convenient method for creating micropatterned conducting polymer films.

78

Page 100: Polymer MEMS

The ability to pattern conducting polymers on the micro and nanoscale is

particularly important for many applications. A number of methods have been introduced

for patterning conducting polymers.13 By carefully tailoring the conducting polymer

chemistry to introduce photosensitivity, photolithography has been used for

micropatterning conducting polymers.14,15 The use of photolithography can be used to

either locally change the conductivity of the polymer or change the solubility of the

polymer in a specific solvent. While photolithographic processing of conducting

polymers has been widely studied, these processes require expensive processing

equipment and fabrication facilities.

In order in reduce the cost and complexity of patterning, soft lithographic

techniques have been explored as alternative fabrication routes. Micromolding in

capillaries (MIMIC)16-18 and microcontact printing18 are two soft lithography based

methods that have been used for the fabrication of conducting polymer microstructures.

The method described here combines double stamp micromolding with in situ

polymerization in a lift-off technique for microfabrication of SPAN microstructures on

both rigid and flexible surfaces. Molding is used to pattern a sacrificial layer from a

thermoplastic polymer. SPAN is then polymerized on the surface and the sacrificial layer

is dissolved in organic solvent, selectively removing SPAN from the surface. Atomic

force microscopy (AFM) was used to measure the film thickness and RMS roughness as

a function of the reaction time. Scanning electron microscopy (SEM) was used to image

the substrates at various steps in the microfabrication process. This method provides an

efficient, low-cost, non-cleanroom method for micropatterning of sulfonated polyaniline

79

Page 101: Polymer MEMS

on a variety of surfaces. This process may have applications ranging from conducting

polymer electronics and sensors to biomedical actuators.

5.2 Materials and methods

5.2.1 SPAN synthesis

Sulfonated polyaniline was synthesized in a manner similar to that described

previously.19 Analine [AN (Aldrich)] and 3-aminobenzenesulfonic acid [metalinic acid

(MA) (Fluka)] were copolymerized in 1 M HCl in an ice bath at 5-15°C. Ammonium

persulfate [APS (Aldrich)] was used as the oxidant. The molar ratio of AN:MA was 1:1

and the molar ratio of oxidant to each monomer was 1:1. Substrates were first attached to

the sidewalls of the reaction vessel. MA was dissolved in HCl and AN was added

dropwise to the reaction vessel. APS then dissolved separately in DI water. The reaction

beaker was placed in an ice bath and the APS solution was added. The reaction was

performed under both static and dynamic conditions. Under static conditions, the reaction

components were mixed thoroughly and the reaction was allowed to proceed without

agitation. Under dynamic conditions, a magnetic stir plate and stir bar were used to

constantly agitate the solution during the reaction.

5.2.2 Micromolding and Lift-off processing

To begin the process, a photoresist master was first fabricated using standard

photolithographic techniques, and the negative of the photoresist pattern was transferred

into PDMS using the molding process described previously. Micropatterning of

sulfonated polyaniline was then performed by patterning a sacrificial layer using double

80

Page 102: Polymer MEMS

stamp micromolding. In situ polymerization on the micropatterned substrate was

performed, followed by solvent lift-off.

Figure 5.1 shows the process for patterning SPAN. The PDMS mold was first

spin coated with a layer of poly(n-propyl methacrylate) (PPMA) (Scientific Polymer

Products). PPMA was dissolved in anisole (Aldrich) at various concentrations depending

on the geometry of the PDMS mold features. For this study, three different mold

geometries were used: a 1.4 µm deep mold with 2 µm wide channels, a 4.8 µm deep mold

with a minimum feature size of 5 µm, and a 7.5 µm deep mold with 20 µm circular

pillars. The PPMA solution and spin condition for each mold were as follows: 5% PPMA

spin coated at 3000 rpm, 10% at 2000 rpm, and 15% at 3000 rpm, respectively.

Figure 5.1 Schematic diagram of sacrificial layer patterning, in situ polymerization, and lift-off; (a) uncoated PDMS mold, (b) PDMS mold spin coated with PPMA, (c) mold is

inverted and applied to heated glass to remove surface polymer, (d) PPMA removed from the raised surface of the PDMS mold, (e) PPMA in recessed features of the PDMS mold,

(f) mold inverted and heat and pressure applied to remove polymer from recessed features, (g) PPMA features after removal of the mold (h) SPAN polymerized directly onto the surface, (h) PPMA removed in acetone leaving the patterned SPAN features.

81

Page 103: Polymer MEMS

After spin coating [Figure 5.1(b)], the polymer on the raised surfaces of the mold

was removed by bringing the mold into contact with a hotplate at 180 ºC and applying

light pressure (~ 2.5 psi) [Figure 5.1(c)]. Figure 5.1(d) shows the material that was

removed from the raised portion of the PDMS mold. The mold was then applied to the

substrate at 95 ºC and pressure was applied to the top of the mold and held for 3-5

seconds. The pressure used for the 1.4 µm, 4.8 µm, and 7.5 µm deep molds were 35, 40,

and 50 psi, respectively. This transferred the PPMA from the recessed portions of the

mold onto the substrate. Three different substrate materials were used in this study: glass,

silicon, and polyimide.

The patterned PPMA layer acted as a sacrificial layer for patterning the SPAN.

After patterning the PPMA, the SPAN was deposited in situ on the substrates for times

ranging from 15 minutes to 2 hours. The substrates were then removed from the reaction

and the PPMA layer was removed by sonication in acetone for 10 seconds followed by

drying in filtered air.

5.2.3 Process characterization

82

Polymer films were characterized using atomic force microscopy (AFM) (Veeco

Dimension 3100) and scanning electron microscopy (SEM) (Hitachi S-3000H). Film

thickness and roughness were measured using tapping mode AFM. The film thickness

was measured by using the AFM stepheight function. The RMS roughness was measured

over a 5 µm x 5 µm scan area at 1.5 Hz and 512 X 512 pixel resolution. SPAN films

deposited on clean silicon substrates were used for thickness and roughness

characterization. SEM was used to visualize the substrates at various steps in the

fabrication process.

Page 104: Polymer MEMS

5.3 Results and discussion

Figure 5.2 shows SEM micrographs of patterned PPMA sacrificial layers (a,b),

sacrificial layers after in situ polymerization of SPAN (c,d), and SPAN patterns after

sacrificial layer lift-off (e,f). Figure 5.2(c) shows a low magnification image to

demonstrate that the process can be used for fabrication of features over a relatively large

area. The minimum line width for the pattern shown is nominally 5 µm.

Figure 5.2 SEM micrographs of; (a,b) patterned PPMA sacrificial layers, (c,d) PPMA layer with SPAN deposited over the entire surface, and (e,f) SPAN micropatterns after

lift-off of the sacrificial layer.

83

Page 105: Polymer MEMS

SPAN film thickness and roughness were characterized throughout the process in

order to optimize the processing conditions to obtain smooth films with well-controlled

thicknesses. The SPAN film thickness and RMS roughness versus reaction time are

shown in Figure 5.3 and Figure 5.4, respectively. The parameters were measured for both

static and dynamic deposition processes to determine the effect of reaction conditions on

the film properties. For a static deposition process, the film thickness increased to a

steady state thickness of approximately 100 nm after 60 minutes of deposition time.

Between 60 and 120 minutes, the film thickness remained relatively constant. Roughness

also remained fairly constant between 45 and 90 minutes, but a large increase in the

average roughness and standard deviation was observed between 90 and 120 minutes.

This is likely due to the formation of larger aggregates of SPAN on the surface. This

phenomenon was confirmed qualitatively by SEM observation.

84

Page 106: Polymer MEMS

0

20

40

60

80

100

120

140

160

180

0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140

Reaction Time (min.)

Film

Thi

ckne

ss (n

m)

Static Dynamic

Figure 5.3 SPAN film thickness versus reaction time for static and dynamic reaction processes.

0

20

40

60

80

100

120

140

0 20 40 60 80 100 120

Reaction Time (min.)

RM

S R

ough

ness

(nm

)

140

Static Deposition Dynamic Deposition

Figure 5.4 RMS roughness of SPAN films versus reaction time for static and dynamic deposition.

85

Page 107: Polymer MEMS

Dynamic deposition significantly altered the deposition process, particularly with

respect to the film thickness. For dynamic deposition, the film thickness was significantly

higher than static deposition for reaction times greater than 60 minutes. A possible

explanation for the difference is local depletion of the aniline monomers during static

deposition. The higher flux of SPAN to the substrate surface could lead to a larger steady

state film thickness. Dynamic deposition did not have a significant effect on the

roughness of the films. The same basic trend in the roughness was observed for both

deposition processes. An increase in the standard deviation of the roughness at 120

minutes again indicates that larger aggregates were beginning to form on the surface.

SEM images of 20 µm circular patterns deposited using dynamic deposition are

shown in Figure 5.5. Figure 5.5(a) shows a low magnification micrograph of independent

features to demonstrate patterning over a large area and a higher magnification image of

the pattern is shown in (b).

Figure 5.5 SEM micrographs of discontinuous SPAN patterns at (a) high and (b) low magnifications.

86

Page 108: Polymer MEMS

5.4 Conclusion

The process described here combines double stamp micromolding with in situ

polymerization for fabrication of microscale patterns of sulfonated polyaniline. The

fabrication method provides a cost effective alternative to conventional cleanroom

fabrication processes and allows fabrication on a variety of both rigid and flexible

substrates. In situ polymerization eliminates the need for post process dissolution of the

polymer and allows polymerization and deposition in a single step. The lift-off process is

analogous to conventional lift-off used for fabrication of metal electrodes. The

insolubility of SPAN in organic solvent allows lift-off process to be employed as a simple

micropatterning technique. The process is capable of producing both continuous (lines)

and discontinuous (circles) patterns. This process has potential for simple fabrication of

SPAN microstructures over a large area for applications in a variety of conducting

polymer applications.

References 1 M. Gerard, A. Chaubey, B.D. Malhotra, “Application of conducting polymers to biosensors.” Biosensors and Bioelectronics 17 (2002) 345-359. 2 S. Geetha, C.R.K. Rao, M. Vijayan, D.C. Trivedi, “Biosensing and drug delivery by polypyrrole.” Analytica Chimica Acta 568 (2006) 119-125. 3 L. Dai, B. Winkler, L. Dong, L. Tong, A.W.H. Mau, “Conjugated polymers for light-emitting applications.” Advanced Materials 13 (2001) 915-925. 4 D. Braun, “Semiconducting polymer LEDs.” Materials Today 5(6) (2002) 32-39. 5 C.J. Drury, C.M.J. Mutsaers, C.M. Hart, M. Matters, D.M. de Leeuw, “Low-cost all-polymer integrated circuits.” Applied Physics Letters 73 (1998) 108-110. 6 N. Stutzmann, R.H. Friend, H. Sirringhaus, “Self-aligned, vertical-channel, polymer field-effect transistors.” Science 299 (2003) 1881-1884.

87

Page 109: Polymer MEMS

7 E.W.H. Jager, E. Smela, O. Inganäs, “Microfabricated conjugated polymer actuators.” Science 290 (2000) 1540-1545. 8E. Smela, “Microfabrication of PPy microactuators and other conjugated polymer devices.” Journal of Micromechanics and Microengineering 9 (1999) 1-18. 9X.L. Wei, Y.Z. Wang, S.M. Long, C. Bobeczko, A.J. Epstein, “Synthesis and physical properties of highly sulfonated polyaniline.” Journal of the American Chemical Society 118 (1996) 2545-2555. 10J. Yue, Z.H. Wang, K.R. Cromack, A.J. Epstein A.G. MacDiarmid, “Effect of sulfonic acid group on polyaniline backbone.” Journal of the American Chemical Society. 113 (1991) 2665-2671. 11J. Stejskal, I. Sapurina, J. Prokeš, J. Zemek, “In-situ polymerized polyaniline films.” Synthetic Metals 105 (1999) 195-202. 12 I. Sapurina, A. Riede, J. Stejskal, “In-situ polymerized polyaniline films 3. Film formation.” Synthetic Metals 123 (2001) 503-507. 13 S. Holdcroft, “Patterning π-conjugated polymers.” Advanced Materials 13 (2001) 1753-1765. 14 D.G. Lidzey, M.A. Pate, M.S. Weaver, T.A. Fisher, D.D.C. Bradley, “Photoprocessed and micropatterned conjugated polymer LEDs.” Synthetic Metals 82 (1996) 141-148. 15 F.J. Touwslager, N.P. Willard, D.M. de Leeuw, “I-line lithography of poly-(3,4-ethylenedioxythiophene) electrodes and application in all-polymer integrated circuits.” Applied Physics Letters 81 (2002) 4556-4558. 16 W.S. Beh, I.T. Kim, D. Qin, Y. Xia, G.M. Whitesides, “Formation of patterned microstructures of conducting polymers by soft lithography, and applications in microelectronic device fabrication.” Advanced Materials 11 (1999) 1038-1041. 17 J.A. Rogers, Z. Boa, V.R. Raju, “Nonphotolithographic fabrication of organic transistors with micron feature sizes.” Applied Physics Letters 72 (1998) 2716-2718. 18 T. Granlund, T. Nyberg, L.S. Roman, M. Svensson, O. Inganäs, “Patterning of polymer light-emitting diodes by soft lithography.” Advanced Materials 12 (2000) 269-273. 19 I. Mav, M. Žigon, A. Šebenik, “Sulfonated polyaniline.” Synthetic Metals 101 (1999) 717-718.

88

Page 110: Polymer MEMS

20 I. Mav, M. Žigon, A. Šebenik, J. Vohlidal, “Sulfonated polyanilines prepared by copolymerization of 3-aminobenzenesulfonic acid and aniline: the effect of reaction conditions on polymer properties.” Journal of Polymer Science A 38 (2000) 3390-3398.

89

Page 111: Polymer MEMS

CHAPTER 6

MICROFABRICATED MEMBRANES FOR CELL ISOLATION

6.1 Introduction

The ability to control the location and morphology of individual cells is extremely

important in several cell biology applications. Isolation of individual cells is critical for

biological experiments such as single cell electroporation1,2 and planar patch clamping.3,4

Positioning of cells is also important in cell-based biosensors,5-7 where cells often need to

be located on electrodes in order for measurements to be carried out. In addition to cell

placement, it is also well established that cell morphology plays a critical role in a variety

of cellular processes including proliferation, differentiation, apoptosis, and motility.8-11

Engineering specific cell behaviors by controlling the cellular environment can be

particularly important for tissue engineering applications.11

Cells often need to be localized in colonies or clusters in order to function

properly. Two examples include liver cells and embryonic stem cells. Isolated

hepatocytes are known to quickly lose liver specific function during in vitro culture. Cell

aggregates, often in the form of spheroids, are needed in order to maintain proper

function.12 Not only the spheroid shape, but also the size of the cluster is important for

maintaining cell viability. This is primarily due to nutrient transport issue at the core of

the cell spheroid.13 Embryonic stem cells are also known to aggregate into spheroids

90

Page 112: Polymer MEMS

called embryoid bodies.14 The ability to control spheroid size and the number of cells per

spheroid could have significant implications in studying hepatocyte and stem cell biology

and in tissue engineering.

Microfabrication is an attractive approach for interacting with individual cells

because of the ability to fabricate structures and devices on the same size scale as cells.

Microcontact printing (µCP)15 has been widely used to locally alter surface chemistry for

cell patterning. µCP is a soft lithography process that uses a poly (dimethylsiloxane)

(PDMS) stamp “inked” with various chemistries including self-assembled monolayers

(SAM)16,17. The stamp is then brought into contact with the surface of interest to transfer

the chemical pattern. The spatial difference in the surface chemistry alters subsequent

protein adsorption, which leads to preferential cell attachment. Cell adhesion proteins

such as fibronectin have also been directly patterned on surfaces to alter cell

attachment.6,18 In addition to alteration of surface chemistry, a combination of surface

topography and chemical modifications have been used to pattern adherent cells.19-20

Several other devices have also been fabricated for isolating individual or groups

of cells.21-24 Elastomeric stencils have been used to pattern groups of adherent cells.22

Cells were patterned by culturing them on a PDMS membrane with through holes, and

removing the membrane after cell attachment. Other passive systems have been used for

cell isolation. Rosenbluth et al.23 used microfabricated SU8 wells for AFM experiments

on non-adherent cells. Another passive device was developed by Fukuda and

Nakazawa.24 They used microfabricated wells of various diameters to create hepatocyte

spheroids of different sizes. Both of these systems rely on passive loading of the cells via

sedimentation.

91

Page 113: Polymer MEMS

Here we present a simple method for active isolation of adherent and non-

adherent cells in microwells with well defined geometries. The device consists of a

micropatterned membrane fabricated on the surface of a commercially available porous

filter. For clarity, it should be noted that from here on the microfabricated structure will

be referred to as the “membrane” and the commercially available portion will be called

the “filter”. The membranes were fabricated from thermoplastic polymers using a spin

dewetting process and transfer molding as described previously.25 Several membrane

geometries were used including circular, square, and hexagonal patterns to control cell

morphology. Individual cells or groups of cells could be isolated within each well by

controlling the seeding density and surface area of the pattern. Cells were isolated by

placing the device in a filtration setup and using vacuum to pull the cells into the wells.

The devices were tested using three different types of cells. NIH 3T3 fibroblasts

cells were isolated as either individual cells or multiple cells by altering the seeding

density. These cells were also used to demonstrate the ability to control cell morphology

by changing the geometrical properties of the microwells. THP-1 lymphocytes were used

to show the ability to isolate non-adherent cells. Finally, C3A hepatocytes were isolated

as well-defined clusters, with the size of the cluster being dependant on the area (i.e.

diameter) of the microwell.

The device has several advantages compared with current cell isolation

technology: no change in surface chemistry is needed to spatially orient the cells; the

device can be used for isolation of adherent or non-adherent cells; and by changing the

area of the wells, cell clusters with controlled sizes can by formed. This device could find

92

Page 114: Polymer MEMS

applications in cell biology studies of individual cells and cell aggregates, cell-based

biosensor arrays, and tissue engineering.

6.2 Materials and methods

6.2.1 Materials

Membranes were fabricated from either poly(propyl methacrylate) (PPMA,

Scientific Polymer Products) or polystyrene (Aldrich). Polymer solutions were made by

dissolving the solid polymers in anisole (Aldrich) at various concentrations depending on

the desired membrane thickness. Several commercially available filters were used. Track

etched polycarbonate filters (Isopore®, Millipore) with 200 nm and 400 nm pores were

used due to their flexibility and relatively good temperature stability. Anodized alumina

filters (Anodisc®, Whatman) with 20 nm pores were used. However, cracking of the

Anodisc filters during the molding process resulted in low yields. Transparent track

etched polystyrene filters (Transwell®, Corning) were also used. These filters provided

the advantage of being optically transparent, which allows observation using an inverted

microscope. However, they can only be used with PPMA membranes due to temperature

stability issues during fabrication.

6.2.2 Membrane fabrication

93

Membranes were fabricated using a two-step soft lithographic micromolding

process combined with spin dewetting. The geometry of the membrane pores was first

defined in a photoresist using standard photolithography. Negative tone SU8 25

(Microchem Corp.) and positive tone SPR 220-7 (Shipley) photoresists were used in the

Page 115: Polymer MEMS

fabrication. Photoresists were spin coated on clean silicon at 3000 rpm and 2000 rpm for

the negative and positive photoresists, respectively. The resulting film thickness was 9.2

µm for SU8 and 7.5 µm for SPR 220-7. The photoresist films were exposed to ultraviolet

light through chrome/glass photomasks with various geometries, and films were

processed according to the manufacturer’s suggested parameters.

The photolithographically patterned silicon wafers were used as a master for

replication of a PDMS mold. The mold was made by first mixing a 10:1 (wt/wt) ratio of

PDMS base with curing agent (Silastic T-2, Dow Corning). The base and curing agent

were mixed thoroughly and poured over the patterned wafer. The PDMS was degassed in

a vacuum dessicator until all bubbles were removed. The PDMS was allowed to cure at

room temperature for 48 hours before removing the mold.

Figure 6.1 shows the remainder of the membrane fabrication process after making

the mold. The mold was spin coated with a solution of PPMA or polystyrene in anisole.

Solutions of 15% (wt/wt) were used on the 7.5 µm deep molds, and 20% (wt/wt)

solutions were used on 9.2 µm molds. Solutions were spin coated at 3000 rpm for 1

minute. After spin coating, dewetting of the polymer was observed as the polymer

separated to form particles on top of the pillar structures of the PDMS molds. The

particles were removed by contacting the polymer with a glass slide at 180ºC (PPMA) or

200ºC (PS) using low pressure (~2.5 psi). This is shown in Figure 6.1(c and d). After

removal of the surface material, the mold was brought into conformal contact with the

filter. The filter was then place on a hotplate at 95ºC (PPMA) or 125ºC (PS) and pressure

of 60 psi was used to transfer the remaining polymer onto the filter. The resulting

structure consisted of through holes in the membrane with access to the underlying filter.

94

Page 116: Polymer MEMS

Figure 6.1 Schematic diagram of the membrane fabrication process; (a) uncoated PDMS mold, (b) mold spin coated with polymer (particles on the top of the pillars form by spin dewetting), (c,d) the coated mold is brought into contact with heated glass to remove the particles, (e) selectively coated mold, (f) the mold is inverted and brought into contact with the heated filter by applying pressure, (g) the final structure after removing the

mold.

6.2.3 Cell culture and filtration

NIH 3T3 mouse fibroblasts were cultured in Dulbecco’s modified Eagle’s

medium (DMEM) supplemented with 10% calf bovine serum and 1% penicillin-

streptomycin. THP-1 monocytes were cultured in RPMI 1640 medium supplemented

with 10% fetal bovine serum (FBS) and 1% penicillin-streptomycin. C3A cells were

cultured in Eagles minimum essential medium (EMEM) supplemented with 10% FBS

and 1% penicillin-streptomycin. All cell lines and culture chemicals were obtained from

95

Page 117: Polymer MEMS

the American Type Culture Collection (ATCC). Cells were incubated at 37ºC in a

humidified atmosphere with 5% CO2.

Figure 6.2 Experimental setup for cell isolation.

Cells were isolated in the wells using a glass microanalysis vacuum filter setup

(Fisher Scientific). The system is shown in Figure 6.2. The membrane/filter was clamped

between a glass funnel and the underlying vacuum filter flask (Fisher Scientific). A cell

suspension in culture medium, with the desired concentration, was then placed in the

funnel on top of the membrane/filter, and vacuum was applied to pull the cell culture

medium through the setup. This trapped the cells in the microfabricated wells of the

membrane. Additional medium was added if required and the device was placed in an

96

Page 118: Polymer MEMS

incubator for 30 minutes to allow cell attachment. For non-adherent cells, the membrane

was immediately removed from the setup and cells were prepared for examination.

6.2.4 Characterization

Microfabricated molds and devices were characterized using scanning electron

microscopy (SEM, Hitachi S3000H). Cell isolation was characterized using SEM and

fluorescence microscopy (Nikon TS 100). Cells were prepared for SEM by dehydration

in graded ethanol solutions (70%, 80%, 90%, and 100%) and hexamethyldisilazane

according to the procedure described by Braet et al.26 For fluorescence microscopy, cells

were fixed in 70% ethanol for 30 minutes at –20 ºC. Cells were then stained with

propidium iodide RNase (PI RNase, BD Biosciences) for 10 minutes at –4 ºC. Samples

were washed three times in phosphate buffered saline (PBS, ATCC) and placed on glass

slides for observation.

6.3 Results and discussion

The four membrane geometries used for NIH 3T3 and THP-1 cell isolation are

shown in Figure 6.3. The features included 20 µm diameter circular features, 20 µm

hexagons (edge to edge), 30 µm squares, and 10 µm diameter circles. All of the images

were taken using the Isopore® polycarbonate filters as the substrate. Figure 6.3(d) clearly

shows the track etched pores in the underlying filter. It is critical that access to the pores

is maintained throughout the fabrication process in order to provide an open pathway

through the entire device to facilitate vacuum filtration of the cells.

97

Page 119: Polymer MEMS

Figure 6.3 SEM micrographs of cell isolation membranes. Feature geometry and size are (a) 20 µm diameter circles. (b) 20 µm (side to side) hexagons. (c) 30 µm squares. And (d)

10 µm diameter circles.

Figure 6.4 presents SEM micrographs of NIH 3T3 cells isolated in the devices.

Figure 4(a) shows one NIH 3T3 cell in each of four 20 µm circular wells. Figure 4(c)

shows cells isolated in two hexagonal wells with two wells empty. Figure 4(e) shows

multiple cells isolated in 30 µm squares. Multiple cells are observed in the upper left and

lower right features, while single cells are isolated in the other two features. Figure

4(b,d,f) shows high magnification images of individual cells isolated in three different

membrane configurations. The images show that the filtration process is not detrimental

to cell viability, as the cells are still able to attach and spread on the filter material.

98

Page 120: Polymer MEMS

Figure 6.4 NIH 3T3 cells isolated in three different mold geometries; (a,b) 20 µm diameter circles, (c,d) 20 µm (side to side) hexagons, (e,f) 30 µm squares.

Figure 6.5 shows SEM images of NIH 3T3 cells isolated in (a) 30 µm square and

(b) 20 µm circular features, after removal of the microfabricated membrane from the

filter. The images show that the cells adhere well to the filter material and that the cells

conform to the geometry of the microfabricated features.

99

Page 121: Polymer MEMS

Figure 6.5 SEM images of NIH 3T3 cells after removing the polymer membrane from the surface of the filter; (a) 30 µm squares, (b) 20 µm diameter circles.

Fluorescent microscopy was also used to image the isolated cells. Figure 6.6

shows the three membrane geometries loaded with a relatively low seeding density (2.5 x

104 cells/ml). Primarily individual cells are isolated in the wells. By increasing the

seeding density to 5 x 104 cells/ml, multiple cells can be observed in many of the wells as

shown in Figure 6.7. The patterns are the same 20 µm circles and 30 µm squares as

Figure 6.7(a and b) with a higher seeding density. This demonstrates the ability to

qualitatively control both the efficiency of the isolation and the number of cells isolated

in each well for a given well geometry.

100

Page 122: Polymer MEMS

Figure 6.6 Fluorescent micrographs of NIH 3T3 cells isolated at low density in (a) 30 µm square, (b) 20 µm hexagonal, and (c) 20 µm circular wells.

Figure 6.7 NIH 3T3 cells isolated in (a) 20µm circular and (b) 30 µm square wells at higher seeding density.

101

Page 123: Polymer MEMS

Non-adherent THP-1 cells were isolated in 10 µm circular wells as show in Figure

6.8. The ability to isolate non-adherent cells is significant, giving the difficulties

presented in manipulating these cells. For these cells, the surface chemistry approaches

cannot be employed for isolation. Some passive techniques have been used for isolating

non-adherent cells, but to our knowledge this is the first active mechanism that has been

employed for isolation of multiple adherent and non-adherent cell types.

Figure 6.8 THP-1 cells isolated in 10 µm circular wells; (a) SEM micrograph of a single cell and (b) fluorescent micrograph of an array of wells.

Finally, the ability to isolate aggregates of cells was demonstrated with C3A liver

cells. Circular wells with 50 µm diameter were used. PPMA membranes were patterned

on Transwell filters. Cells were seeded at 5x105 cells/ml. Figure 6.9 shows low

magnification (a) and higher magnification (b) fluorescent images of groups of

hepatocytes isolated within the wells. An SEM micrograph of the cell aggregates after

removing the membrane is shown in Figure 6.9(c).

102

Page 124: Polymer MEMS

Figure 6.9 Images of C3A cell clusters; (a) low and (b) high magnification fluorescent images of cells in 50 µm diameter circular wells, (c) SEM micrograph of a cell clusters

after removing the patterned membrane.

103

Page 125: Polymer MEMS

6.4 Conclusion

Micromolding of polymer membranes was used for isolation of adherent and non-

adherent cell lines. The process provides a simple method for spatial control of cell

location as well as control of cell morphology in the case of adherent cells. The efficiency

of the isolation as well as the number of cells isolated in each well was controlled by the

density of the cell suspension. Adherent cells were able to attach and spread on the filter

material. In addition, non-adherent cells were also successfully isolated. These devices

could be used in a number of applications including biological studies of cell morphology

as well as in cell-based biosensors. These devices are also well suited for single cell

experiments where spatial isolation of cells in needed.

References 1 Y. Huang, B. Rubinsky, “Microfabricated electroporation chip for singe cell membrane permeabilization.” Sensors and Actuators A 89 (2001) 242-249. 2 M. Khine, A. Lau, C. Ionescu-Zanetti, J. Seo, L.P. Lee, “A single cell electroporation chip.” Lab on a Chip 5 (2005) 38-43. 3 K.G. Klemic, J.F. Klemic, M.A. Reed, F.J. Sigworth, “Micromolded PDMS planar electrode allows patch clamp electrical recordings from cells.” Biosensors and Bioelectronics 17 (2002) 597-604. 4 X. Li, K.G. Klemic, M.A. Reed, F.J. Sigworth, “Microfluidic system for planar patch clamp electrode arrays.” Nano Letters 6 (2006) 815-819. 5 P. Wang, G. Xu, L. Qui, Y. Xu, Y. Li, R. Li, “Cell-based biosensors and its application in biomedicine.” Sensors and Actuators B 108 (2005) 567-584. 6 M. Nishizawa, K. Takoh, T. Matsue, “Micropatterning of HeLa cells on glass substates and evaluation of respiratory activity using microelectrodes.” Langmuir 18 (2002) 3645-3649.

104

7 C.S. Chen, M. Mrksich, S. Huang, G.M. Whitesides, D.E. Ingber, “Micropatterned surface for control of cell shape, position, and function.” Biotechnology Progress 14 (1998) 356-363.

Page 126: Polymer MEMS

8 C.S. Chen, M. Mrksich, S. Huang, G.M. Whitesides, D.E. Ingber, “Geometric control of cell life and death.” Science 276 (1997) 1425-1428. 9 Y. Ito, “Surface micropatterning to regulate cell function.” Biomaterials 20 (1999) 2333-2342. 10 A. Brock, D. Chang, C. Ho, P. LeDuc, X. Jiang, G.M. Whitesides, D.E. Ingber, “Geometric determinant of directional cell motility revealed using microcontact printing.” Langmuir 19 (2003) 1611-1617. 11 S.N. Bhatia, C.S. Chen, “Tissue Engineering at the Micro-scale.” Biomedical Microdevices 2 (1999) 131-144. 12 M. Khalil, A. Shariat-Panahi, R. Tootle, T. Ryder, P. McCloskey, E. Roberts, H. Hodgson, C. Selden, “Human hepatocyte cell lines proliferating as cohesive spheroid colonies in alginate markedly upregulate both synthetic and detoxificatory liver function.” Journal of Hepatology 297 (2001) 68-77. 13 R. Clicklis, J.C. Merchuk, S. Cohen, Modeling mass trasfer in hepatocyte spheroids via cell viability, spheroid size and hepatocellular funtion.” Biotechnology and Bioengineering 86 (2004) 672-680. 14 S.M. Dang, M. Kyba, R. Perlingeiro, G.Q. Daley, P.W. Zandstra, “Efficiency of embryoid body formation and hematopoietic development from embryonic stem cells in different culture systems.” Biotechnology and Bioengineering 78 (2002) 442-453. 15 Y. Xia, G.M. Whitesides, “Soft Lithography.” Annual Review of Materials Science 28 (1998) 153-184. 16 M. Mrksich, L.E. Dike, J. Tien, D.E. Ingber, G.M. Whitesides, “Using microcontact printing to pattern the attachment of mammalian cells to self-assembled monolayers of alkanethiolates on transparent films of gold and silver.” Experimental Cell Research 235 (1997) 305-313. 17 R.S. Kane, S.Takayama, E. Ostuni, D.E. Ingber, G.M. Whitesides, “Patterning proteins and cells using soft lithography.” Biomaterials 20 (1999) 2363-2376. 18 H. Kaji, K. Takoh, M. Nishizawa, T. Matsue, “Intracellular Ca2+ imaging for micropatterned cardiac myocytes.” Biotechnology and Bioengineering 81 (2003) 748-751. 19 K.Y. Suh, J. Seong, A. Khademhosseini, P.E. Laibinis, R. Langer, “A simple soft lithographic route to fabrication of poly(ethylene glycol) microstructures for protein and cell patterning.” Biomaterials 25 (2004) 557-563.

105

Page 127: Polymer MEMS

20 M.R. Dusseiller, D. Schlaepfer, M. Koch, R. Kroschewski, M. Textor, “An inverted microcontact printing method on topographically structured polystyrene chips for arrayed micro-3-D culturing of single cells.” Biomaterials 26 (2005) 5917-5925. 21 E.W.H. Jager, C. Immerstrand, K.H. Peterson, K. Magnusson, I. Lundström, O. Inganäs, “The cell clinic: closable microvials for single cell studies.” Biomedical Microdevices 4 (2002) 177-187. 22 A. Folch, B. Jo, O. Hurtado, D.J. Beebe, M. Toner, “Microfabricated elastomeric stencils for micropatterning cell cultures.” Journal of Biomedical Materials Research 52 (2000) 346-353. 23 M.J. Rosenbluth, W.A. Lam, D.A. Fletcher, “Force microscopy of nonadherent cells: a comparison of leukemia cell deformability.” Biophysical Journal 90 (2006) 2994-3003. 24 J. Fukuda, K. Nakazawa, “Orderly arrangement of hepatocytes spheroids on a microfabricated chip.” Tissue Engineering 11 (2005) 1254-1262. 25 N. Ferrell, D. Hansford, “Fabrication of micro- and nanoscale polymer structures by soft lithography and spin dewetting.” Macromolecular Rapid Communications 28 (2007) 964-967. 26 F. Braet, R. De Zanger, E. Wisse. Drying cells for SEM, AFM and TEM by hexamethyldisilazane: a study on hepatic endothelial cells. Journal of Microscopy 186 (1997) 84-87.

106

Page 128: Polymer MEMS

CHAPTER 7

FABRICATION OF SUSPENDED POLYMER MICROSTRUCTURE BY PATTERNED SUBSTRATE MICROMOLDING AND SACRIFICIAL LAYER

MICROMOLDING

7.1 Introduction

MEMS technology has traditionally been focused on silicon based fabrication

techniques. In order to broaden the potential applications of MEMS devices, novel

materials must be considered for some applications. Polymers are of particular interest

due to their unique and diverse material properties and low cost, relative to silicon.

Polymer MEMS (P-MEMS) also hold great potential for biological applications due to

the inherent biocompatibility of many polymer materials.1 While silicon based fabrication

techniques are well established and understood, new processing techniques need to be

developed for polymer materials. This chapter introduces two methods for fabrication of

freely suspended three dimensional polymer microstructures for bioMEMS applications:

sacrificial layer micromolding (SLaM) and patterned substrate micromolding (PSM).

Photolithography has been the standard in fabricating polymer microstructures

due to its prevalence in microelectronics processing. Recently, several processes have

been developed for microfabrication of polymeric microstructures and devices from

materials other than standard photosensitive polymers. Microscale hot embossing2

microinjection molding,3 as well as the soft lithography based fabrication methods,

107

Page 129: Polymer MEMS

including replica molding,4 solvent assisted micromolding4 (SAMIM), microtransfer

molding (µTM),5 and micromolding in capillaries (MIMIC)6 have all been developed for

fabrication of polymer microstructures. These processing methods have found utility in a

number of biomedical applications such as microfluidic diagnostic and analytical

devices,7,8 tissue engineering,9,10 and drug delivery .11 However, they are generally used

for fabrication of planar structures. For suspended structures, other techniques such as

etching3 or photolithography using negative photoresist12 must be used. These processes

are limited in the materials that can be used in fabrication and require extensive use of

expensive cleanroom facilities and equipment.

SLaM and PSM provide alternative methods for fabrication of suspended polymer

microstructures from a wide range of thermoplastic, biocompatible polymer materials

that are not traditionally used in microfabrication but are common in biomaterials

applications. In addition, polymer materials are generally inexpensive and a majority of

the process can be performed outside of a cleanroom with minimal use of expensive

microfabrication equipment, thus reducing the overall cost of the process. The

applicability of these processes to a wide range of structural materials also increases the

materials selection pool, allowing materials to be selected based on appropriate biological

interactions.

Both SLaM and PSM involve double stamp molding processes followed by

alignment and bonding to a micropatterned substrate. The processes are capable of

yielding polymer microstructures from thermoplastic polymers with resolution

comparable to the resolution of the photolithography process. In the present work,

PPMA, PMMA, and polystyrene were used as model polymers. PPMA was used because

108

Page 130: Polymer MEMS

of its ease of processing due to its low glass transition temperature (~37°C), and PMMA

and polystyrene were chosen due to their wide use in biomedical applications. The same

basic process could also be extended to a variety of other thermoplastic polymer

materials. The processes provide a simple and cost effective method for fabrication of

polymer devices for integration into MEMS based sensor and actuator systems.

7.2 Materials and methods

7.2.1 PDMS mold fabrication

The device geometries were initially fabricated from photoresist using standard

photolithography. A layer of either SU8-5 negative tone photoresist (MicroChem Corp.)

or S1813 positive tone photoresist (Shipley) was spin coated on a <100> p-type silicon

wafer (WaferNet). The photoresist and spin speed used in the initial process were

selected based on the desired final structure geometry and thickness. After coating, the

wafers were processed according to the manufacturers’ suggestion processing parameters.

The photoresist features were transferred into a poly(dimethlysiloxane) (PDMS)

elastomer for use in fabricating the final polymer structural features. The process of

PDMS molding from a photoresist master is described in detail elsewhere.13 Briefly, a

10:1 ratio of T-2 transparent base and curing agent (Dow Corning) was mixed and stirred

thoroughly. The mixture was then poured over the patterned silicon wafer and placed in

a vacuum dessicator to remove bubbles incorporated during mixing. The sample was

removed from the vacuum periodically, and a razor blade was used to remove surface

bubbles. After the bubbles were completely removed, the PDMS mold was allowed to

109

Page 131: Polymer MEMS

cure at room temperature for 48 hours before removing the mold from the wafer. The

wafer could be used multiple times for making PDMS molds.

7.2.2 Sacrificial layer micromolding

Figure 7.1 shows the fabrication process used in the sacrificial layer

micromolding process. Poly(vinyl alcohol) (PVA) (Sigma-Aldrich) was chosen as a

sacrificial layer due to its solubility in water, insolubility in organic solvents, and thermal

stability. A 10:1 ratio of deionized water and PVA were mixed and heated to 70 ºC to

promote dissolution. After the polymer had completely dissolved, the solution was

filtered through high flow rate filter paper to remove impurities. The PVA/water solution

was spin coated on silicon wafers for 60 seconds at a spin speed of 1000 rpm. After

coating, the wafers were baked at 95 ºC for five minutes to remove any residual water.

The resulting sacrificial layer thickness was ~750 nm. Sacrificial layer thickness was

characterized using tapping mode atomic force microscopy (AFM) (Veeco, Dimension

3100). The sacrificial layer thickness can be varied by changing the PVA concentration

and spin speed. A thin layer (~400 nm) of poly(methyl methacrylate) (PMMA)

(Scientific Polymer Products) was then spin coated on the PVA layer and baked at 115 ºC

for two minutes. The PMMA layer acted to protect the PVA from being dissolved during

development in the upcoming photolithography process. A layer of SPR220-7 positive

tone photoresist (Shipley) was spin coated on the PMMA layer at 4500 rpm resulting in a

photoresist thickness of ~4.5 µm. The photoresist was processed according to the

manufacturer’s processing parameters to expose the anchor regions of the underlying

PMMA and PVA layers.

110

Page 132: Polymer MEMS

Figure 7.1 Schematic diagram of the sacrificial layer micromolding method. (a) sacrificial layer patterning process, (a,i) substrate is coated with PVA, PMMA, and photoresist, respectively, and the photoresist is patterned via photolithography, (a,ii)

surface is exposed to O2 plasma to etch the PMMA and PVA layers, (a,iii) photoresist and PMMA are removed with acetone, (b) micromolding, (b,i) patterned PDMS mold is uniformly coated with the structural polymer, (b,ii) coated mold is brought into contact

with a heated glass plate to remove surface material, (b,iii) glass plate is removed leaving polymer only in the recessed portions of the mold, (c) alignment and bonding, (c,i)

sacrificial layer and patterned mold are aligned, (c,ii) sacrificial layer and structural layer are brought into contact and bonded under heat and pressure, (c,iii) mold is removed,

(c,iv) sacrificial layer is removed by immersion in water.

The PMMA and PVA layers were then etched with an oxygen plasma in a

benchtop reactive ion etcher (Technics, MicroRIE 800). The patterned SPR220-7 layer

acted as an etch mask. An oxygen flow rate of 15 sccm, power of 200W, and 163 mTorr

pressure were used during the etch process. After the exposed PMMA and PVA were

selectively removed and the substrate anchor points were exposed, the wafer was

111

Page 133: Polymer MEMS

immersed in acetone for two minutes to remove the PMMA and photoresist layers,

leaving only the patterned PVA. After removal from the acetone bath, samples were dried

with a gentle stream of nitrogen.

The structural portion of the devices was fabricated via a modified micro-transfer

molding process.14,15 Poly(n-propyl methacrylate) (PPMA) (Scientific Polymer Products),

polystyrene (Sigma-Aldrich), and PMMA (Scientific Polymer Products) were chosen as

structural materials. Polymers were dissolved in anisole (Sigma-Aldrich) at

concentrations ranging from 1-10% (wt/wt). The polymer solution was spin coated onto

the patterned PDMS mold at spin speeds from 1000-6000 rpm for 60 seconds. Devices

ranged from ~200 nm to >5 µm in thickness based on the above parameters. To remove

the polymer from the surface (not in the recessed features) of the PDMS, the mold was

brought into contact with a glass slide heated to 175 °C. The same temperature was used

for all three structural materials. The mold was held on the slide for 5-10 seconds under

the pressure of its own weight. The mold was immediately removed, with the glass slide

still in contact with the heat source. The process was repeated if necessary to completely

remove the surface material, leaving the polymer only in the recessed portions of the

PDMS mold.

The selectively patterned PDMS mold was then aligned with the sacrificial layer

under an optical microscope. The substrate was heated to 95 ºC for PPMA, 120 ºC for

polystyrene, and 175 ºC for PMMA and a pressure of 0.21 MPa (30 psi) was applied to

the backside of the mold and held for 10 seconds. The pressure brought the structural

material into contact with the substrate material and the heating process promoted

adhesion between the sacrificial and structural layers. The molds were removed, resulting

112

Page 134: Polymer MEMS

in the final unreleased structures. Resultant device thickness was a function of the PDMS

mold depth, polymer concentration, and spin speed. Devices were characterized using a

mechanical stylus profilometer (Veeco Dektak, Series 3), atomic force microscopy, and

scanning electron microscopy (Hitachi, S-3000H)

The devices were released by immersion in DI water, which dissolved the

sacrificial PVA layer. Stiction during the drying process prevents the devices from being

operated under dry conditions. Our studies have shown that the released devices remain

separated from the substrate so long as they are maintained in an aqueous environment.

7.2.3 Patterned substrate micromolding

The patterned substrate method is similar to the sacrificial layer method in that the

same microtransfer molding process is used for fabrication of the structural portion of the

devices. The method differs in choice of the substrate material. For the sacrificial layer

method, silicon or glass acted as the substrate material and anchor region for the devices,

and a sacrificial material is removed to release the device. For the patterned substrate

method, a layer of patterned photoresist acts as the substrate material, and voids in the

photoresist layer act as the suspended portions of the devices.

Figure 7.2 shows a schematic of the patterned substrate fabrication method. A

layer of SU8-25 negative tone photoresist was patterned via standard photolithography

processing. The photoresist was coated at 2000 rpm, yielding a film thickness of

approximately 25 µm. The model substrate geometry for this work consisted of 20-30 µm

wide channels with 500 µm spacing between the channels.

113

Following the photolithography process, the double stamp micromolding process

described earlier was performed with a PMDS mold of the desired device geometry. In

Page 135: Polymer MEMS

this case, a mold geometry with 5 µm wide channels with 45 µm spacing was used,

yielding final structures consisting of an array of 5 µm wide beams suspended over the

20-30 µm channels in the photoresist. This is shown in Figure 7.2(a). The selectively

coated mold and photolithographically patterned substrate were then brought into contact

with heat and pressure. This transferred the polymer in the PDMS mold onto the

photoresist substrate with polymer suspended across the gaps in the patterned substrate.

Figure 7.2 Schematic diagram of the micromolding process used in polymer beam fabrication; (a) selectively coated PDMS mold, (b) mold inverted and aligned with

patterned substrate, (c) heat a pressure used to stamp the features, and (d) mold removed.

114

Page 136: Polymer MEMS

7.3 Results and discussion

Scanning electron micrographs of devices resulting from the SLaM process are

shown in Figure 7.3. The images show that multiple and complex geometries are

achievable and that the integrity of the feature geometry can be maintained throughout

the PDMS molding and micromolding processes. The features in Figure 7.3(d) are

nominally 750 nm, indicating that the feature resolution of the process reproduces that of

the photolithography process. The devices are shown prior to release of the sacrificial

layer. Figure 7.4 shows optical micrographs of polymer cantilevers beams before and

after release of the sacrificial layer. Figure 7.4(a) shows 10 µm wide beams before the

sacrificial layer was removed, and 7.4(b) shows the suspended devices after removal of

the sacrificial layer.

Figure 7.3 Scanning electron micrographs of devices made by the sacrificial layer micromolding (SLaM) method. Devices are shown prior to release of the sacrificial layer.

Arrows indicated the structural PPMA regions, sacrificial PVA layer, fixed anchor regions, and underlying silicon substrate. Structures shown include (a) cantilevers, (b)

cross-bridges, and (c) cantilever with through holes. The features in (d) have nominally 750 nm line width and are shown to demonstrate process resolution.

115

Page 137: Polymer MEMS

Figure 7.4 Optical micrographs of polymer cantilevers fabricated using the sacrificial layer micromolding process (a) before removal of the sacrificial layer and (b) after

release.

Figure 7.5(a) shows a phase contrast micrograph of a released PPMA cantilever for

low magnitude lateral force measurement applications. The cantilever is 250 µm long, 5

µm wide, and 3.5 µm thick. A micropipette was used to apply a force to the cantilever as

shown in Figure 7.5(b). Deflection of the beam was then measure optically and related to

the force magnitude using the cantilever beam bending equation:

3

3LEIxF = (1)

where F is the applied load, x is the measured deflection, L is the distance from the base

of the beam to the applied load, E is the Young’s modulus, and I is the area moment of

inertia. The load was assumed to be a point load and was applied at 245 µm from the base

of the cantilever. The modulus was taken to be 0.7 GPa16 and the moment of inertia

calculated from the above geometry is 3.65x10-23 m4. The deflection of the beam was

measured at 20 µm using image analysis software (ImagePro Discovery). The magnitude

116

Page 138: Polymer MEMS

of the resulting force is 104 nN. The same force applied to a silicon beam (E=190 GPa)17

would result in a lateral deflection of only 74 nm. This deflection would not be detectable

using a standard optical microscopy, and a much more sophisticated measurement system

would be needed. This illustrates the potential of using polymer MEMS for fabrication of

highly sensitive devices that would not be functional if they were fabricated from

standard silicon based MEMS materials.

Figure 7.5 Phase contrast micrographs of 5 µm wide cantilevers made using the sacrificial layer micromolding process (a) after removal of the sacrificial layer and (b)

after application of a 104 nN force using a micropipette tip.

Resulting devices from the patterned substrate micromolding (PSM) process are

shown in Figure 7.6. Polystyrene beams are shown in Figure 7.6(a) and PPMA beams in

Figure 7.6(b). The images show that the devices remain suspended over the channels with

a flat beam profile between the anchor points. The ability to fabricate flat structures over

the channels is constrained by the width of the channel (i.e. the portion over which the

device is suspended). For the work described here, 30 µm was the maximum channel

117

Page 139: Polymer MEMS

width used for fabrication of 5 µm wide structural features. Further work is needed to

determine the maximum attainable functional region for this or other feature geometries.

The non-uniformity of the channels in the substrate is a result of the use of a printed

transparency mask14 as opposed to a chrome/glass mask. Resolution of the substrate

channels could be considerably improved by use of a chrome/glass mask, but a

significant increase in cost would also be incurred.

Figure 7.6 Scanning electron micrographs of (a) polystyrene and (b) PPMA beams made using the patterned substrate method. The substrate is photolithographically patterned

SU8 photoresist.

118

The proper choice of a polymer MEMS fabrication method is dependant on the

given application. Both fabrication methods described here are limited by practical

Page 140: Polymer MEMS

fabrication constrains. The most significant constraint for the sacrificial layer

micromolding process at present is the inability to operate devices in dry conditions due

to stiction issues. Work is current being done to develop a drying process to minimize

this effect, allowing the devices to remain suspended in air. The geometrical constrains of

the SLaM technique are minimal. Suspended regions of >200 µm can be achieve and

remain suspended in aqueous environment. In contrast, the PSM allows devices that can

be operated in dry condition, but the length of the suspended regions of the device are

limited to those that maintain their structural integrity.

Given that both fabrication methods use a soft mold for fabrication, distortion of

the features during the final stamping process results in an undesirable loss of feature

resolution if the processing parameters for a given device geometry are not appropriately

selected and characterized. Figure 7.7 shows AFM section scans of devices of similar

geometries with (a) properly selected and (b) poorly selected processing parameters. The

parameters that are important for minimizing mold distortion are mold depth, polymer

solution concentration, spin speed, and stamping transfer pressure. The processing

parameters must be adjusted for any given feature geometry. As an example, the feature

in Figure 7.7(a) was processed using a 1.4 µm deep mold, 5% polymer solution, 4000

rpm spin speed, and 0.21 MPa (30 psi) transfer pressure. The mold distortion is less

critical for the PSM techniques, since the functional regions of the devices are never not

brought into contact with the substrate, thus the functional portions maintain their

geometrical integrity even if processing parameters are not completely optimized.

119

Page 141: Polymer MEMS

Figure 7.7 AFM section analysis of features with (a) appropriately selected process parameters and (b) poorly chosen process parameters. Important parameters include

mold depth, solution concentration, spin speed, and transfer pressure. The top feature has a height of 875 nm and the bottom feature has a maximum height of 1.12 µm and a

minimum height of 760 nm.

7.4 Conclusion

Successful fabrication of suspended polymer microstructures was achieved using

two different fabrication methods. Both processes are soft lithography based and rely on a

two-step micromolding process. The choice of substrate material (i.e. sacrificial layer or

patterned substrate) is application dependant, as each method is capable of producing

devices of different geometries and for specific operating conditions. The processes are

relatively simple and low cost as compared to silicon fabrication techniques, and the

120

Page 142: Polymer MEMS

transition from silicon to polymer materials could potentially broaden both the

functionality and applicability of the devices in a biological setting.

References 1 B.D. Ratner, A.S. Hoffman, F.J. Schoen, and J.E. Lemons, Biomaterials Science An Intoduction to Materials in Medicine, Elsevier Academic Press, San Diego, CA (2004) p. 67. 2 H. Becker and U. Heim, “Hot embossing as a method for the fabrication of polymer high aspect ratio structures.” Sensors and Actuators A 83 (2000) 130-135. 3 L.J. Lee, M.J. Madou, K.W. Koelling, S. Daunert, S. Lai, and C.G. Koh, “Design and fabrication of CD-like microfluidic platforms for diagnostics: polymer-based microfabrication.” Biomedical Microdevices 3 (2001) 339-351. 4 Y. Xia, G.M. Whitesides, “Soft lithography.” Annual Review of Materials Science 28 (1998) 153-184. 5 X.-M. Zhoa, Y. Xia, and G.M. Whitesides, “Fabrication of three-dimensional micro-structures: microtransfer molding.” Advanced Materials 8 (1996) 837-840. 6 E. Kim, Y. Xia, and G.M. Whitesides, “Polymer microstructures formed by moulding in capillaries.” Nature 376 (1995) 581-584. 7 H. Becker, C. Gärtner, “Polymer microfabrication methods for microfluidic analytical applications.” Electrophoresis 21 (2000) 12-26. 8 S.K. Sia, G.M. Whitesides, “Microfluidic devices fabricated in poly(dimethylsiloxane) for biological studies.” Electrophoresis 24 (2003), 3563-3576. 9 G. Vozzi, C. Flaim, A. Ahluwalia, S. Bhatia, “Fabrication of PLGA scaffolds using soft lithography and microsyringe deposition.” Biomaterials 24 (2003), 2533-2540. 10 S.N. Bhatia, C.S. Chen, “Tissue engineering at the microscale.” Biomedical Microdevices 2 (1999) 131-144. 11 B. Ziaie, A. Baldi, M. Lei, Y. Gu, and R.A. Siegel, “Hard and soft micromachining for BioMEMS: a review of techniques.” Advanced Drug Delivery Reviews 56 (2004) 145-172

121

12 G. Genolet, J. Brugger, M. Despont, U. Drechsler, P. Vettiger, N.F. de Rooij, D. Anselmetti, “Soft, entirely photoplastic probes for scanning force microscopy.” Review of Scientific Instruments 70 (1999) 2398-2401.

Page 143: Polymer MEMS

13 D.C. Duffy, J.C. McDonald, O.J.A. Schueller, G.M. Whitesides, “Rapid prototyping of microfluidic systems in poly(dimethylsiloxane).” Analytical Chemistry 70 (1998) 4974-4984. 14 J. Guan, A. Chakrapani, D.J. Hansford, “Polymer microparticles fabricated by soft lithography.” Chemistry of Materials 17 (2005) 6227-6229. 15 J. Guan, H. He, D.J. Hansford, L.J. Lee, “Self-folding of three-dimensional hydrogel microstructures.” The Journal of Physical Chemistry B 109 (2005) 23134-23137. 16 G. Wei, B. Bhushan, N. Ferrell, D. Hansford, Journal of Vacuum Science and Technology A 23, 811-819 (2005). 17 K.E. Peterson, “Silicon as a mechanical material.” Proceedings of the IEEE 70 (1982) 420-457.

122

Page 144: Polymer MEMS

CHAPTER 8

MEASURING THE MECHANICAL PROPERTIES OF POLYMER MICROSTRUCTURES BY NANOINDENTATION

8.1 Introduction

Mechanical characterization of materials is critical for design, modeling, function,

and reliability of MEMS devices. This is particularly important in the case of polymer

MEMS, where micro and nanoscale polymer properties may differ significantly from

bulk material properties.1-3 In the case of device design and modeling, a good grasp of the

materials properties will lead to a better understanding of device behavior prior to

fabrication. This in turn leads to fewer iterations in the design, decreased cost, and faster

device development. In terms of function, characterization of the material properties is

important for ensuring that the device will perform as designed. Finally, characterization

of the failure properties of materials will aid in understanding and improving the long

term reliability of MEMS.

Some of the important properties that are relevant for polymer MEMS

development include microscale hardness, elastic modulus, creep, adhesion, scratch

resistance, yield strength, and breaking strength. For biomedical applications of polymer

MEMS, devices often need to be operated in aqueous condition and/or at elevated

123

Page 145: Polymer MEMS

temperatures. Therefore, the polymer properties need to be tested under the appropriate

environmental conditions to simulate operating conditions.

Many well-established techniques are available for bulk macroscale materials

characterization. However, these methods are not generally applicable to micro and

nanoscale polymer characterization. Specialized characterization techniques are needed

to accommodate these high resolution measurements and small sample volumes.

Nanoindentation is a powerful tool for micro/nanoscale materials characterization. In

nanoindentation, a nanoscale tip with a know geometry is used to penetrate a material.

Similar to macroscale indentation tests, this data can be used determine the hardness of

the material. In addition, by measuring both load and displacement simultaneously, other

materials properties, including elastic modulus, can be determined. Some of the

advantages of nanoindentation include the ability to make measurements on extremely

thin films. The high resolution of nanoindentation with respect to load and displacement

are is also advantageous for measuring properties at very low loads.4 Some disadvantages

of nanoindentation are the need to correct for various instrumental factors, including

determining the point of the tip-material contact, accounting for the compliance of the

load frame, and determining the area function. Additionally, materials issue such as

creep, material pile-up around the tip, and substrate effects must be accounted for. While

many of these issues can be minimized by proper calibration and data analysis, failure to

account for these effects can lead to complication or misinterpretation of data.5

Many nanoindenters are also equipped with the continuous stiffness measurement

(CSM) technique.6 The CSM technique allows the nanoindenter tip to be oscillated at

high frequency while the load applied by the tip is incrementally increased. A plot of the

124

Page 146: Polymer MEMS

CSM load cycle is shown in Figure 8.1. Unlike conventional nanoindentation, where data

can only be collected at the unloading point, CSM allows continuous measurement of the

mechanical properties throughout the loading cycle. In addition, the high frequency tip

oscillation minimizes the influence of creep on the hardness and elastic modulus

measurements. CSM also allows measurement of the creep properties of a material by

applying a constant load and measuring the change in the indentation depth over time.

Figure 8.1 Load-displacement plot for CSM nanoindentation. The inset shows the high frequency oscillation of the tip during the load cycle.

125

We performed detailed mechanical characterization of four different materials

that have been or could potentially be used in polymer MEMS devices. The materials

chosen for this study were poly(methyl methacrylate) (PMMA), poly(propyl

methacrylate) (PPMA), poly(styrene) (PS) and a polystyrene-nanoclay composite

(PS/Clay). PMMA and PS are widely used engineering polymers. Historically, PMMA

Page 147: Polymer MEMS

has been the polymer of choice in ophthalmologic devices due to its high refractive

index, hardness and biocompatibility. Its surface can be functionalized with proteins,

which promotes bonding of tissues for in vivo implants.7 PMMA is also employed in

chips and valve components for immunosensors and other lab-on-a-chip applications.8,9

PPMA has a lower glass transition temperature (Tg) (35-43 oC)10 than PMMA (104-

106oC)11,12 which allows for easier processing at a lower temperature.

Polystyrene is particularly desirable for BioMEMS due to its ubiquitous use in

tissue culture applications. Tissue culture treated polystyrene is the most commonly used

material for in vitro cell biology studies of adherent cells. Thus, there is a wealth of

information about cellular behavior on polystyrene. In addition to tissue culture

polystyrene, various surface modification techniques can be employed for functionalizing

the PS surface in order to promote cell attachment and proliferation.7 Oxygen plasma

modified polystyrene has been shown to improve cell growth, proliferation, and

expression of cellular adhesion proteins proportional to the surface oxygen

concentration.13 The previous knowledge of cellular interactions with polystyrene makes

it a logical choice to use in BioMEMS devices for cellular interactions.

Clay nanoparticles in a polymer matrix act to improve the mechanical and thermal

properties as compared to the native polymer.14,15 Nanoclay composites can also be used

to improve barrier resistance and improve ionic conductivity. The extent to which

polymer properties are affected is determined by the clay content, polymer/clay

interfacial strength, and dispersion of the clay particles. Improvements in these

properties have made polymer nanocomposites candidate materials for use in the

automotive and aerospace industries.16,17 In addition, polymer nanocomposites have been

126

Page 148: Polymer MEMS

considered for diverse applications such as food packaging, flame retardants and

batteries.18-20

In polymer MEMS applications, the ability to control material properties over a

range of values could significantly improve device design flexibility. The

polystyrene/clay nanocomposite is beneficial, as it may allow fine-tuning of the

mechanical properties by varying the filler content while maintaining the

biocompatibility of the PS matrix. Complete redesign of the device is avoided as the

stiffness of the material can be altered as needed. Since the device design and fabrication

procedure are not changed, the process becomes more cost-effective.

Here, we present microscale mechanical property characterization of PPMA,

PMMA, polystyrene, and polystyrene/clay nanocomposites. Hardness, elastic modulus,

and creep properties were measured by CSM nanoindentation on supported polymer

microstructures. Elastic modulus was also measured by performing force-deflection

measurements on suspended microbridges fabricated using patterned substrate

micromolding (PSM). Yield and breaking strengths were evaluated by normal beam

bending at elevated loads. Scratch tests were performed on polymer films by translating

the nanoindenter tip across the surface on the film while ramping the load. The relative

scratch resistance of the materials was evaluated using the tip displacement profile and

SEM images of the damage. Finally, lateral bending of PS and PS/Clay cantilever beams

is demonstrated for the first time. Hardness and elastic modulus experiments were

conducted on samples that were soaked in deionized water to assess the effect of the

aqueous medium. In addition, the indentation and bending response of the polymer beams

127

Page 149: Polymer MEMS

was examined at human body temperature (37.5 oC) by fitting a heating assembly into the

indenter’s sample stage.

8.2 Materials and methods

8.2.1 Fabrication of polymer microstructures and thin films

Polymer solutions (PPMA, PMMA, and PS) were made by dissolving the

materials in anisole at various concentrations depending on the application. To prepare

the nanocomposite, the clay was first dispersed in the PS matrix by melt compounding.

The composite was then dissolved in anisole and sonicated for at least 8 hours to dissolve

the polymer and re-disperse the particles. The resulting concentration of the clay was

10% wt/wt (clay/PS). The clay additive in PS/Clay is Cloisite® 20A surface modified

natural montmorillonite (Southern Clay Products, Inc.) with thickness of approximately 1

nm and lateral dimensions of 70-150 nm.

128

Polymer microbridges were fabricated using the patterned substrate micromolding

technique21 as described in Chapter 7. Polymer cantilevers for lateral force measurements

were fabricated by sacrificial layer micromolding with one process variation. The mold

for the lateral force cantilevers consisted of 50 µm wide channels that were

approximately 27 µm deep. The PDMS mold was coated with a 15% solution of PS or

10% solution of PS/Clay. The polymers were removed from the mold and transferred to

the substrate using the same process that was used for PS in the previous chapter, except

that the PS/Clay was removed at a higher temperature (175 °C) than PS (125 °C). The

primary difference in the processes was the addition of a reinforcing structure at the base

of the cantilevers as indicated in Figure 8.2(vii). The reinforcement was applied using the

same process, with the reinforcing structures oriented perpendicular to the original

Page 150: Polymer MEMS

structures. This provided the necessary reinforcement to ensure that the polymer

cantilever was not delaminated from the surface during the test.

The polymer films that were used to assess the scratch resistance were made by

dissolving the polymers in anisole at various concentrations to achieve a film thickness of

approximately 500 nm. The polymer solutions were then spin coated on silicon at 3000

rpm for 1 minute. The films were then baked at 95 °C for 2 minutes to remove any

residual solvent. The thickness of the film samples was evaluated by scratching the film

with a razor blade and measuring the thickness using a stylus profilometer.

Figure 8.2 Schematic diagram of the process for fabrication of polymer cantilevers for lateral force measurements.

8.2.2 Mechanical characterization

Figure 8.3 shows an SEM micrograph of a polymer beam with the testing

locations for hardness, elastic modulus, and creep. The figure also shows the location of

129

Page 151: Polymer MEMS

the bending tests that were used to evaluate the elastic modulus, yield strength, and

breaking strength. Hardness, elastic modulus, and creep of the supported section of the

microstructures were measured using the CSM technique with a NanoIndentor II® (MTS

Systems Corp) with a diamond Berovich tip. The hardness and elastic modulus were

determined continuously between contact and 500 nm using a peak-to-peak load

amplitude of 1.2 µN at a frequency of 45 Hz. Creep was measured using a 30 µN

constant load that was held for 600 seconds.

Figure 8.3 SEM micrograph of the microbridges showing the location of the indentation experiment on the substrate supported portion of the structure and bending tests on the

suspended region of the structure.

130

Page 152: Polymer MEMS

Details of the numerical calculations for determining the hardness and elastic

modulus from the nanoindentation data can be found in Oliver and Pharr22 or Bhushan

and Li.23 Hardness (H) is calculated using equation 1:

AP

H max= (1)

where Pmax is the maximum load and A is the projected contact area. The elastic modulus

(E) is calculated by first determining what is referred to as the reduced modulus (Er)

according to equation 2:

ASEr 2

π= (2)

where S is the stiffness. The elastic modulus for the material can then be calculated from

equation 3:

)/)1(()/1(1

2

2

ttr EEE

υυ−−

−= (3)

where υ is the Poisson’s ratio of the material being tested, and υt and Et are the Poisson’s

ratio and elastic modulus of the tip material, respectively. Poisson’s ratio values for

PMMA, PS, PS/Clay, and PPMA were taken as 0.35, 0.325, 0.33 and 0.33, respectively.

Data for the Poisson’s ratio of PS/Clay and PPMA were not available, so a value of 0.33

was estimated based on the value for typical thermoplastic polymers.11

For scratch testing, a conical tip with included angle of 90° and radius of

curvature of 1 µm was translated over the surface of the polymer films as the load was

ramped to a maximum of 0.5 mN. The scratch length was 500 µm and the velocity was 5

µm/s. The coefficient of friction and scratch depth were measured with respect to the

131

Page 153: Polymer MEMS

normal load. The damage to the polymer film was evaluated using scanning electron

microscopy.

The beam bending experiments were performed using a conical tip with 1 µm

diameter and 90° radius of curvature. A schematic diagram of the nanoindenter setup for

bending tests is shown in Figure 8.4. The tip was dip coated with 2% PMMA (wt/wt) to

avoid damaging the beams with the tip. The bending location was determined using a

1500x microscope objective to apply the load as close as possible to the center of the

beam. In order to maintain the proper location, the recalibration of the distance between

the indenter and the microscope was repeated frequently according to the manufacturer’s

specifications. This calibration was performed on a soft material, polycaprolactone, to

minimize the damage to the PMMA coating on the tip. Samples were also tested after

soaking in deionized water for 36 hours to determine the effect of prolonged exposure to

aqueous environment. The sample stage was also heated to 37 °C to test the material

properties at body temperature. Details of the heating stage can be found elsewhere.24

The elastic modulus was calculated from the load-displacement plot according to

equations 4 and 5:25

12

3bhI = (4)

mI

lE192

3

= (5)

where I is the area moment of inertia for the rectangular beam cross section, b is the

width of the beam and h is the height of the beam. The elastic modulus can then be

calculated using equation 5, where l is the length of the beam and m is the slope of the

load displacement curve. 132

Page 154: Polymer MEMS

Yield and breaking strength of the polymer beams were evaluated by normal

beam bending at higher loads than those used to evaluate the elastic modulus. The yield

and breaking strength (σ) were calculated from equation 6:25

243

bhFl

=σ (6)

where F is the load corresponding to either the onset of yield or total failure, and l, b, and

h are length, width, and height of the beam, respectively.

Figure 8.4 Nanoindentation setup for beam bending.

Lateral bending tests were performed on the polymer cantilevers. The cantilevers

were first released by immersion in deionized water for 1 hour. The samples were tested

133

Page 155: Polymer MEMS

in water to avoid stiction of the cantilevers during the drying process. The nanoindenter

tip was then position 20 µm from the tip of the free end of the cantilever at a distance of

approximately 200-300 µm away from the edge of the cantilever. A scratch test was

performed at a constant load of 400 µN. Any additional load was attributed to the lateral

force of the beam against the tip.

8.3 Results and discussion

8.3.1 Hardness and elastic modulus by CSM nanoindentaion

Typical plots of the hardness and elastic modulus as a function of the penetration

depth are shown in Figure 8.5. Each material was tested five times (n=5) and the values

were taken at a penetration depth of the 100 nm. The respective hardness and elastic

modulus were found to be 390 ± 50 MPa and 5.1 ± 0.4 GPa for PS/Clay, 340 ± 30 MPa

and 4.8 ± 0.5 GPa for PMMA, 290 ± 20 MPa and 3.6 ± 0.4 GPa for PS, and 110 ± 30

MPa and 1.7 ± 0.5 GPa for PPMA. The values are given as the average ± the standard

deviation.

134

Page 156: Polymer MEMS

Figure 8.5 Plots of hardness and elastic modulus as a function of contact depth for CSM nanoindentation measurements.

8.3.2 Creep behavior by CSM nanoindenation

The viscoelastic nature of polymer materials makes creep behavior an important

consideration for polymer devices. The creep behavior of the materials was tested by

holding the load constant at 30 µN and monitoring the displacement of the tip over time.

Figure 8.6 shows plots of the tip displacement, mean stress, and contact stiffness versus

time for each material. The plots show that the displacement increases and the mean

stress decreases over time for each of the materials. This behavior is indicative of creep,

as the polymer material deforms around the tip. The data shows that all of the materials

exhibit some creep behavior. However, the rate of creep is directly related to the hardness

and modulus of the materials, with the harder materials with higher modulus showing the

135

Page 157: Polymer MEMS

slowest creep rate. The addition of a ceramic component in the PS/Clay nanocomposite

also helps to decrease the creep.

Figure 8.6 Displacement, mean stress, and contact stiffness as a function of time for a constant applied load of 30 µN.

8.3.3 Scratch resistance from nanindentation scratch test

Results from scratch testing are shown in Figure 8.7. The plots give the

coefficient of friction (left axis) and scratch depth (right axis) as a function of the normal

load. SEM images were taken at the beginning (region A), middle (region B), and end

(region C) of the scratch to evaluate the damage to the films. PMMA showed the best

scratch resistance, as indicated by a low penetration depth and smooth scratch profile.

136

Page 158: Polymer MEMS

The addition of clay nanoparticles seemed to improve the scratch properties of the

PS/Clay material relative to unmodified polystyrene. The spikes in the depth profile for

PS/Clay are attributed to roughness in the film. Polystyrene showed signs of film

delamination and material pile-up around the tip at approximately 0.45 mN. This is

indicated by sudden instability in the depth profile and is confirmed by SEM observations

near the end of scratch. PPMA showed the lowest scratch resistance with delamination

and pile-up occurring between 0.2-0.25 mN. Again, this was confirmed by SEM imaging

of the scratch.

Figure 8.7 Plots of the coefficient of friction and depth profile for nanoindentation scratch tests (left) and SEM images at the beginning (region A), middle (region B), and end

(region C) of the scratch.

137

Page 159: Polymer MEMS

8.3.3 Elastic modulus from normal beam bending

Figure 8.8 shows an example of data from a bending experiment performed with

an uncoated diamond tip. The plot shows an obvious change in the load/displacement

profile between 75-100 nm of displacement and a load of approximately 2 µN. This

effect results from significant penetration of the tip into the surface of the beam

structures. To avoid this effect, the tip was coated with a thin layer of PMMA for all

bending test. While the compliance of the PMMA coating is not considered in the

calculation of the modulus, it is assumed to be negligible given the small thickness of the

coating.

Figure 8.8 Load-displacement plot for PPMA beam bending with an uncoated diamond nanoindenter tip.

All other bending tests were performed with a PMMA coated tip to minimize the

damage to the beam. Figure 8.9 shows typical plots of the loading and unloading cycle

for each of the four materials tested. The plots show the expected linear behavior for

138

Page 160: Polymer MEMS

elastic bending. The slope of the load-displacement plot was determined by a best-fit line

of the loading portion of the plot. The elastic modulus and standard deviation (n=5) for

each material are shown in the figure and are summarized in Table 8.1.

Figure 8.9 Load-displacement plots for beam bending with a maximum load of 10 µN.

139

Page 161: Polymer MEMS

The elastic modulus from the beam bending can be compared with those obtained

from CSM nanoindentation as well as the bulk values available in the literature. The bulk

elastic modulus for PMMA and polystyrene were found to be 3.1-3.3 GPa11,12 and 3.2-3.4

GPa11, respectively. These values are shown in Table 8.1. The values for PPMA and

PS/Clay were not available in the literature. The results show fairly good agreement

between the modulus obtained from all three sources. This suggests several things. First,

the variation in the data is attributed to differences between the experimental methods

and not to variations in the behavior of the materials at the microscale. In other words,

with respect to the elastic modulus, the materials seem to behave according to the bulk

properties at this size scale. Moreover, the consistency of the beam bending tests seems to

validate this method as a legitimate means to characterize the elastic modulus of

microscale polymer structures. Some error may be associated with assumptions on the

boundary conditions as well as some plastic deformation of the beam surface by the tip.

However, these errors do not have a prohibitive effect on the overall measurements.

Polymer Elastic Modulus (GPa)

Bulk (literature) Nanoindentation Normal beam bending PPMA 1.7 0.7 PMMA 3.1-3.311,12 4.8 1.9 PS 3.2-3.411 3.6 1.9 PS/Clay 5.1 4.6

Table 8.1 Summary of elastic modulus measured by nanoindentation and microbeam bending and comparison with bulk values.

140

Page 162: Polymer MEMS

8.3.4 Effects of aqueous environment and temperature

The materials were tested after soaking in an aqueous environment and at human

body temperature to determine if the materials behave differently under simulated

physiological conditions. Any major differences in the behavior have a significant impact

on the application of these materials for biological purposes. The materials were tested by

both CSM nanoindentation and beam bending. The results are summarized in Figure

8.10. No significant differences were seen in the properties of PMMA, PS, or PS/Clay in

response to aqueous environment or elevated temperature. PPMA showed a decrease in

elastic modulus in response to both soaking and elevated temperature. This is not

unexpected, given the lower glass transition temperature and more open molecular

structure of PPMA relative to the other materials. While PPMA may still be a potentially

useful material in polymer MEMS devices, the operating conditions must be considered

in the design and implementation of PPMA based devices.

141

Page 163: Polymer MEMS

Figure 8.10 Hardness and elastic modulus of PPMA, PMMA, PS, and PS/Clay in response to soaking in aqueous environment and temperature measured by (a) CSM

nanoindentation and (b) beam bending.

142

Page 164: Polymer MEMS

8.3.5 Yield and breaking strength from normal beam bending

Beam bending tests were performed at higher loads (3 mN and 10 mN) to

evaluate both the yield strength and breaking strength of the materials. These experiments

were also valuable for evaluation of the failure mechanisms of the polymer

microstructures. Figure 8.11 shows load-displacement plots for beams tested at 3 mN and

10 mN. Arrows in the plots indicate the yield point and breaking point. The plots at 3 mN

show the obvious onset of yield as the load-deflection plot becomes nonlinear. At this

load, however, only PS/Clay failed completely as indicated in the figure. At 10 mN, all of

the beams broke as indicated by a gap in the load-displacement plot. As expected, when

the beam breaks, there is no longer a force being applied to the beam, which in turn leads

to a gap in the data collection. The spike in the load-displacement plot after the beams

break results from the nanoindenter tip becoming wedged in the channel. The data and

SEM images show one significant difference in the failure between the materials: PPMA,

PMMA, and PS all exhibited significant plastic deformation prior to total failure,

indicating a ductile failure, while PS/Clay, although also exhibiting some plastic

deformation, showed a more brittle failure.

143

Page 165: Polymer MEMS

Figure 8.11 Load-displacement plots and SEM images for bending tests at 3 mN (top) and 10 mN (bottom).

144

Page 166: Polymer MEMS

8.3.6 Lateral beam bending

Results of lateral force bending tests and SEM images of the cantilevers after

testing are shown in Figure 8.12. The load-displacement plot is in general agreement with

the expected behavior of the materials. A linear region of the plot is followed by the onset

of yield. For PS, a decrease in the load following yield indicates cracking of the beam.

For PS/Clay, the gap in the data indicates breaking of the beam. While this new method

for evaluating materials shows some promise for materials evaluation, the results from

the tests do not match well with data obtained via other methods. Therefore, the results

from these tests are only considered to be qualitative. However, proof of principle for this

method of testing is established, and further refinement of this technique could make it a

valuable tool for evaluating materials and devices that are subjected to lateral forces.

Figure 8.12 Load-displacement plots and SEM images of PS and PS/Clay cantilever measured by lateral bending.

145

Page 167: Polymer MEMS

8.4 Conclusion

Mechanical properties of polymer microstructures and polymer films were

evaluated using several different techniques. CSM nanoindentation of supported polymer

microstructures was used to measure hardness, elastic modulus, and creep. The scratch

resistance of the materials was evaluated with the nanoindenter scratch testing with the

aid of SEM imaging. Beam bending experiments were performed on suspended polymer

microbridges and the results were used to calculate the elastic modulus, yield strength,

and breaking strength of the microstructures. Aside from breaking strength, the property

measurements were similar to bulk materials properties obtained from the literature.

Hardness and elastic modulus were evaluated under simulated physiological conditions.

Only PPMA showed a change in mechanical properties under these conditions. Lateral

force bending of the beams was demonstrated as a potential method for evaluating

materials, but further refinements to the technique are need in order to obtain meaningful

quantitative property measurements.

References 1 J.A. Forrest, D. Dalnoki-Veress, “The glass transition in thin polymer films.” Advances in Colloid and Interface Science 94 (2001) 167-196. 2 J.L. Keddie, R.A.L. Jones, R.A. Cory, “Size-dependent depression of the glass transition temperature in polymer films.” Europhysics Letters 27 (1994) 59-64. 3 B. Bhushan, A.V. Kulkarni, W. Bonin, J. Wyrobek, “Nano/picoindentation measurement using a capacitance transducer system in atomic force microscopy.” Philosophical Magazine A 74 (1996) 1117-1128. 4 S.J. Bull, “Nanoindentation of coating.” Journal of Physics D 38 (2005) R393-R413. 5 A.C. Fischer-Cripps, “Critical review of analysis and interpretation of nanoindentation test data.” Surface and Coatings Technology 200 (2006) 4153-4165.

146

Page 168: Polymer MEMS

6 X. Li, B. Bhushan, “A review of nanoindentation continuous stiffness measurement technique and it applications.” Materials Characterization 48 (2002) 11-36. 7 I.H. Loh, M.S. Sheu, A.B. Fishcer, Biocompatible polymer surfaces, in Desk Reference of Functional Polymers: Synthesis and Applications (edited by R. Arshady) American Chemical Society, Washington, D.C. (1997). 8 D.B. Holt, P.R. Gauger, A.W. Kusterbeck, F.S. Ligler, “Fabrication of a capillary immunosensor in polymethyl methacrylate.” Biosensors and Bioelectronics 17 (2002) 95-103. 9 A. van der Berg (ed.), Lab-on-a-chip Chemistry in Miniaturized Synthesis and Analysis Systems, Elsevier, Amsterdam (2003). 10 B. Ellis, Polymers: A Properties Database, Available on compact disk, CRC, Boca Raton, FL (2000). 11 J. Brandrup, E.H. Immergut, E.A. Grulke (eds.), Polymer Handbook, Wiley, New York, NY (1999). 12 J.E. Mark, Polymer Data Handbook, Oxford University Press, Oxford (1999). 13 T.G. van Kooten, H.T. Spijker, H.H. Busscher, “Plasma-treated polystyrene surfaces: model surface for studying cell-biomaterial interactions.” Biomaterials 25 (2004) 1735-1747. 14 M. Alexandre, P. Dubois, “Polymer-layered silicate nanocomposites: preparation, properties and uses of a new class of materials.” Materials Science and Engineering 28 (2000) 1-63. 15 S.S. Ray, M Okamoto, “Polymer/layered silicate nanocomposites: a review from preparation to processing.” Progress in Polymer Science 28 (2003) 1539-1641. 16 J. Njuguna, K. Pielichowski, “Polymer nanocomposites for aerospace applications: properties.” Advanced Engineering Materials 5 (2003) 769-778. 17 F. Gao, “Clay/polymer composites: the story.” Materials Today 7 (2004) 50-55. 18 G. Beyer, “Nanocomposites: a new class of flame retardants for polymers.” Plastic Additives and Composites 4 (2002) 22-28. 19 M. Kurian, M.E. Galvin, P.E.. Trapa, D.R. Sadoway, A.M. Mayes, “Single ion conducting polymer-silicate nanocomposite electrolytes for lithium battery applications.” Electrochimica Acta 50 (2005) 2125-2134.

147

Page 169: Polymer MEMS

20 R.Y. Lockhead, C.R. Haynes. S.R. Jones, V. Smith, “The high throughput investigation of polyphenolic coupler in biodegradable packaging materials.” Applied Surface Science 252 (2006) 2535-2548. 21 H. Liu, B. Bhushan, “Investigation of nanotribological properties of self-assembled monolayerss with alkyl and biphenyl spacer chains.” Ultramicroscopy 91 (2002) 185-202. 22 W.C. Oliver, G.M. Pharr, “An improved technique for determining hardness and elastic modulus using load and displacement sensing indentation experiments.” Journal of Materials Research 7 (1992) 1564-1583. 23 B. Bhushan, X. Li, “Nanomechanical characterization of solid surfaces and thin films.” International Materials Review 48 (2003) 125-164. 24 H. Liu, B. Bhushan, “Investigation of nanotribological properties of self-assembled monolayers with alkyl and biphenyl spacer chains.” Ultramicroscopy 91 (2002) 185-202. 25 W.C. Young, R.G. Budynas, Roark’s Formulas for Stress and Strain, Wiley, New York, NY (2002).

148

Page 170: Polymer MEMS

CHAPTER 9

DESIGN, SIMULATION, AND FABRICATION OF A POLYMER SENSOR FOR MEASURING SINGLE CELL FORCES

9.1 Introduction

One particular area where polymer MEMS could be effectively employed is in the

field of cellular biomechanics. When cells adhere to the extracellular matrix or to a

foreign material, mechanical forces are generated at the adhesive contacts. Following

adhesion, cytoskeletal organization occurs, and molecular linkages between the adhesion

contacts and cytoskeletal components transmit forces through intracellular stress fibers

and adhesion sites to the underlying substrate.1

One of the key barriers to studying cellular mechanics is a lack of sensitive

measurement devices with the ability to accurately evaluate static and dynamic cellular

forces. A few MEMS and non-MEMS devices have been explored for measuring cellular

adhesion2,3, traction forces4,5, cell contractile forces6, and intracellular mechanics7.

Polymer MEMS offer several advantages over current devices due to their inherent

biocompatibility, high sensitivity based on material properties, and low cost fabrication

methods.

We set out to design a polymer sensor to measure forces generated by single

adherent cells. The device is based on an array of polymer microcantilevers. When cells

149

Page 171: Polymer MEMS

attach to the cantilevers, forces are transmitted to the beams resulting in deflection. By

measuring the beam deflection and calculating the force-deflection response of the beam,

the force vector can be calculated.

Design and simulation are critical steps in the device development process. Proper

design and accurate simulation of the device behavior can be performed prior to

fabrication of a prototype device. An adequate understanding of the key design

parameters will increase the likelihood that the device will provide the necessary

functionality in practice. Well thought out simulations of the device behavior will ensure

that the device functions in the expected manner. Both of these steps ultimately lead to

fewer design iterations, decreased cost, faster device development, and improved

functionality.

The design and simulations of the polymer MEMS cell force sensor will be

discussed here. A general overview of the device will be given along with a detailed

discussion of the parameters that were considered in the design. The force-deflection

behavior of the device was modeled using finite element analysis. Improvements in the

device design for second and third generation devices will be discussed with respect to

improving the force measurement capabilities as well as improving the biological

interactions between the cell and the device. The data analysis process for converting

experimental beam deflection data into force vector information will also be discussed.

150

Page 172: Polymer MEMS

9.2 Materials and methods

9.2.1 Solid modeling for device visualization

SolidWorks three-dimensional computer aided drafting (CAD) software was used

to visualize the device during the design process. This allowed for visualization of

different design iterations to consider possible problems with respect to device

fabrication and function. Additionally, CAD drawings could be integrated directly into

the modeling and fabrication processes. SolidWorks data could be imported into the finite

element simulation package and used directly in the photomask fabrication process.

9.2.2 Finite element analysis

The response of each prototype design was simulated using ANSYS finite

element analysis software. A single probe was isolated and analyzed by applying a range

of forces to the end of the cantilever beam and observing the deflection simulations.

Several simulation parameters were considered: changes in the simulations with respect

to the mesh (i.e. solid versus surface mesh), number of mesh elements, boundary

conditions, nature of the applied load, and force application location. Further design

modifications were made based on the simulation results to arrive at a set of initial

designs.

9.2.3 Device development and prototyping process

The process of transitioning from design to prototype began with the photomask

preparation process. This involved first developing the layout of the mask in SolidWorks.

One important consideration in the layout is the number of different designs that are

considered for a single mask. Too few designs can result in a narrow range of operating 151

Page 173: Polymer MEMS

parameters, and may require new mask production after a short period of time. Too many

designs can be impractical given that a limited number of different devices can be tested

over a given period of time. Another important consideration is the spacing between the

devices. Proper spacing can make device fabrication and the alignment of different

device layers significantly easier. In addition, the number of repeats of each design is

important. This determines the frequency of fabrication runs and impacts the device

fabrication time and cost. After the layout was completed, the SolidWorks file was

exported as a .dxf (AutoCAD file extension) file that could be sent directly to the mask

manufacturer for processing.

9.2.4 Device fabrication

152

The devices were fabricated using sacrificial layer micromolding (SLaM). The

process will be described briefly here, but details of the process can be found in Chapter

7. The fabrication schematic for the sensor is also shown in Figure 9.1. All devices were

initially fabricated from SU8 5 or SU 2005 (Microchem Corp.) with minor changes in the

photoresist thickness depending on the desired beam thickness. Devices were transferred

to PDMS molds using the standard molding process. Polyvinyl alcohol (PVA) sacrificial

layers were produced by photolithography followed by reactive ion etching to expose the

anchor regions of the substrate. Initial devices were fabricated from PPMA. The polymer

was dissolved in anisole (Sigma-Aldrich) at concentrations ranging from 1.2-10%

(wt/wt). The polymer solution was spin coated at onto the patterned PDMS mold at spin

speeds from 2000-6000 rpm for 60 seconds. Resultant device thickness was a function

of the PDMS mold depth, polymer concentration, and spin speed. Devices ranged from

180 nm to 3.7 µm based on the above parameters. To remove the surface polymer, the

Page 174: Polymer MEMS

mold was brought into contact with a glass slide heated to 175-185 °C. The mold was

held on the slide for ten seconds under the pressure of its own weight and then removed.

The process was repeated if necessary to completely remove the surface PPMA, leaving

the polymer only in the recessed features. The selectively patterned PDMS mold was then

manually aligned with the sacrificial layer under an optical microscope at 40x

magnification. The substrate was heated to 95º C and a pressure of 30 lb/in2 was applied

to the backside of the mold and held for 10 seconds.

Later generations of the device were fabricated from polystyrene. In this case, a

7.5% (wt/wt) solution was spin coated on the mold at 3000 rpm. The first stamping was

done at 200 ºC and the temperature of the second stamp was 120 ºC and the pressure was

increased to 70 psi. The polystyrene devices were also annealed at 115 ºC for 15 minutes

to reduce any residual stress in the beams.

Figure 9.1 Fabrication of force sensors by sacrificial layer micromolding; (a) Sacrificial layer patterning process, (b) structural layer molding, and (c) alignment and bonding.

153

Page 175: Polymer MEMS

9.2.5 Device characterization

The thickness of each device was measured individually after testing. The

thickness was measured using either atomic force microscopy (AFM) or a stylus

profilometer (Dektak, Series 3). Scanning electron microscopy and optical microscopy

were used to image the devices.

9.3 Results and discussion

9.3.1 Design considerations

Several factors were taken into consideration in the design of the sensor. Factors

related to function, fabrication, materials selection, and cost were all considered

individually or in combination to determine a set of designs for the initial fabrication run.

In term of function, it was necessary to design a device capable of measuring forces with

high sensitivity and high resolution. The expected force range for most cells is in the

range of hundreds of nanonewtons (nN) and dynamic changes in these forces are often

small (on the order of tens of nN) over short periods of time. The device must be capable

of measuring forces and changes in force on this scale. Spatial resolution of the force

measurements was also considered. A sufficient number of measurement locations on

each cell is advantageous in providing information about the spatial distribution of forces.

Material selection was a critical parameter in the function, biological interactions,

and cost. Polymers offer some particular advantages over traditional MEMS materials.

The low elastic moduli of polymers are advantageous for low magnitude force

measurements. Cantilevers made from low modulus materials provide larger deflections

per unit force, thus increasing the sensitivity of the measurements. Many polymers are

154

Page 176: Polymer MEMS

also biocompatible and are currently used in a number of implant and in vitro cell biology

applications. This is particularly true with polystyrene, which is the most common

material for in vitro cell culture. Polymers are generally less expensive than other MEMS

materials for both the material and processing costs. Most of the fabrication techniques

described here can be performed outside of a cleanroom setting without the expensive

processing equipment needed for purely silicon based processing.

The beam geometry was considered in the overall cost of device development.

One of the most costly steps in the process is mask production. The overall cost of the

mask is determined primarily by the smallest feature size. Masks with a minimum feature

size of 5 µm or larger are significantly less expensive than masks with features smaller

than 5 µm. This was taken into consideration relative to the width of the beam and the

spacing between the cantilevers. A beam width of 5 µm was used and a minimum spacing

between cantilevers was also 5 µm.

The design also took into consideration the evaluation of future devices with

increased levels of sophistication. It was necessary to use a generalized fabrication

protocol that could be easily adapted to different materials, device geometries, and

applications. The ability to add higher-level functions to the basic device was also

considered. The first several generations of the devices are passive structures that respond

to the cell. The ability to incorporate fluidics and actuation mechanisms into an active

device could significantly increase functionality.

9.3.2 Device overview

155

The device is based on an array of compound polymer cantilever beams. The

device consists of three primary functional regions. These are shown in the first

Page 177: Polymer MEMS

generation device model in Figure 9.2. The first region is the cell active area. This is the

portion in the center of the device where the cell is located for the measurements. When

the cell attaches and spreads on the cell active area, forces are transmitted to the

underlying cantilever beam array. This leads to deflection of the beams proportional to

the magnitude of the applied force. The beam deflections are captured over time using a

CCD camera attached to an inverted phase contrast microscope. The force vector is then

calculated from the deflection data. The second region of the device is the cantilever

array. This consists of a set of suspended cantilever beams that span the distance between

the cell active area and the outside edge of the device. The cantilevers are configured

such that forces can be measured in any direction in the plane of the structure. The shape

of the beam is designed to give a specific force-deflection behavior as guided by finite

element simulations. The third portion of the device is the anchor region, where the

device is fixed to the underlying substrate.

Figure 9.2 Generation 1 cell force sensor with labeled functional regions.

156

Page 178: Polymer MEMS

9.3.3 First generation cell force sensor

The first generation of the device consisted of an array of compound cantilevers

with a single bend in the beam (L-beam) that provides the ability to measure force in

multiple directions. Two configurations of the first generation device were considered.

The circular configuration is shown in Figure 9.2 and the linear configuration is shown in

Figure 9.3. In the linear configuration, the beams are fixed at anchor region of the device

and converge in the cell active area. For the linear configuration, the beams are fixed in

two parallel sets of beams on either side of the device. The circular configuration is well

suited for essentially static cells, while the linear configuration was designed to allow

measurements on motile cells.

Figure 9.3 Linear configuration of the first generation cell force sensor with labeled functional regions.

The force-deflection behavior of the first generation device was simulated using

finite element analysis. Inputs to the finite element simulations included the geometry of

157

Page 179: Polymer MEMS

the structure and the mechanical properties of the structural material. The geometry of the

device was imported directly from the SolidWorks models, with the exception of the

beam thickness. A discussion of the method to correct for the thickness of the beam is

given in Section 9.3.6. The elastic modulus is also important for simulating the force-

deflection behavior. For PPMA devices, a modulus of 2.0 GPa was used. This value was

estimated based on being in the middle range between the values for the elastic modulus

obtained from normal beam bending and nanoindentation experiments (see Chapter 8).

Force inputs were applied to the beams in 30˚ increments over 360˚ as shown in Figure

9.4. Forces at three magnitudes (5 nN, 10 nN, and 20 nN) were applied to a circular area

in the center of the pad at the end of the cantilever. The x,y deflection profile for all three

forces are shown in Figure 9.5.

Figure 9.4 (a) Image of the L-beam cantilever used in the FEA simulations, (b) close up view of the end of the beam with the direction-angle convention.

158

Page 180: Polymer MEMS

The deflection profile shows several key features. Ideally the x,y deflection would

produce a circular profile with the direction of the deflection being in the same direction

as the force. The plot in Figure 9.5 shows a skewed elliptical deflection profile, indicating

that the beam responds non-linearly to forces applied in different directions. The

consequence is that the device has different resolution and sensitivity depending on the

direction of the deflection. For deflections in direction 6 and 12, the device has higher

sensitivity and gives a larger deflection for a given force. However, there is lower

resolution in determining the direction of the force. The opposite is true for deflection

corresponding to directions 3 and 4 (60˚-90˚) and directions 9 and 10 (240˚-270˚). In

these general directions, the device has lower sensitivity and gives smaller deflection for

a given force, but the ability to resolve the direction of the force improves. For the

direction convention, refer to Figure 9.4. In addition, the plot shows a significant

difference between the direction of the deflection and the direction of the force. This

complicates determination of the force vector direction from the deflection data. A

detailed discussion of determining the force vector magnitude and direction is given in

Section 9.3.6. The plot also shows the expected linearity between the magnitude of the

force and the magnitude of the deflection, as indicated by the concentricity and spacing

of the ellipses.

159

Page 181: Polymer MEMS

-2.0

-1.5

-1.0

-0.5

0.0

0.5

1.0

1.5

2.0

-3.5 -3.0 -2.5 -2.0 -1.5 -1.0 -0.5 0.0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5

y-deflection (µm)

x-de

flect

ion

(µm

)

5 nN

15 nN

30 nN

Position 1

Position 4Position 7

Position 10

Figure 9.5 Deflection plot for the first generation cell force sensor.

The finite element simulations were also used to determine if the devices behave

in the linear elastic regime for the expected range of forces. Estimates of the yield

strength for PPMA and polystyrene can be found in chapter 8. The values for maximum

stress and strain found in the FEA simulations were well below even more conservative

estimates of stress and strain needed to induce yield of the materials.

Despite some complications in the L-beam design, this configuration still

provides adequate force-deflection characteristics to allow for meaningful measurement

to be taken. The first fabrication run was performed with the first generation device in

both the circular and linear configurations. Devices with 4, 6, 8, 10, and 12 probe circular

configurations and a linear device with 14 cantilevers were chosen for the initial

fabrication run.

160

Page 182: Polymer MEMS

Fabrication results for the first generation sensor are shown in Figure 9.6. The

SEM images in Figure 9.6 are shown prior to release of the sacrificial layer. An optical

micrograph of the device immersed in phosphate buffered saline after release is shown in

Figure 9.7(a). A microprobe attached to a micromanipulator was used to apply a force to

the beam to induce a deflection, showing that the beam is free to move and that the beam

returns to its initial location after the probe is removed as shown in Figure 9.7(b,c).

Figure 9.6 SEM micrographs of the (a) circular 12 probe device and (b) linear 14 probe device.

161

Page 183: Polymer MEMS

Figure 9.7 Optical micrographs of the circular 4 probe device (a) before bending with a microprobe, (b) during bending, and (c) after removing micromanipulator tip.

9.3.4 Second generation cell force sensor

Given the limitations in the L-beam design and lessons learned from initial

fabrication and biological testing with the first generation device, a second generation

device was developed to improve the force-deflection response of the beam, make

fabrication easier, and improve the cell-sensor interactions. The geometry of the

compound cantilever was redesigned to provide a more uniform deflection profile.

Several lessons learned from the L-beam were taken into consideration for the new

design. Most notably, the highest deflection per unit force was in the direction

perpendicular to the line between the fixed base of the beam and the end of the beam as

shown in Figure 9.8. While this line provides the highest sensitivity, it also gives the

162

Page 184: Polymer MEMS

largest offset between the direction of the deflection and the direction of the force.

Therefore, by combining two L-beams into a single beam, with specific angles between

the fixed base and the ends of the beams, it was possible to decrease the offset between

the direction of the deflection and the direction of the force. In addition, this indicates a

more homogeneous sensitivity. This was the guiding principle in the development of the

second generation beam design.

Figure 9.8 L-beam showing the line of highest sensitivity.

Several other factors were taken into consideration for designing the second

generation device. First, geometrical constraints imposed by the circular configuration

affects the ability to increase the number of cantilevers on the device without physical

interference (contact) between the beams. During the iterative design process, it was also

noted that the geometry of the bends in the cantilever affects of the response. This is

shown in Figure 9.9. By reducing the width of the beam and the bends, it is possible to

produce a hinge-like structure and reduce the non-linearity in the deflection response.

163

Page 185: Polymer MEMS

However, this is constrained by the width of the beam. It is advantageous to maintain the

5 µm minimum feature size to keep the cost of the device low.

Figure 9.9 Image of the beam joint showing the material that was removed to create a hinge-like bend.

With respect to the fabrication and biological aspects of the device, it was noted

in the first generation that the width of the anchor region small enough that it was

difficult to align the structural and sacrificial regions of the device. The width of the

anchor region was increased from 50 µm to 130 µm to minimize this issue. It was also

noted that it was difficult for the cells to attach and spread on the relatively small surface

area of the first generation devices. The cell active area of the second generation devices

was increased significantly to allow the cell to spread more naturally on the device.

The final geometry for the second generation beam is shown in Figure 9.10(a).

Figure 9.10(b-e) shows how the new beam design fits into a 4, 6, 8, and 10 probe systems

without interference between the beams. The images also show the increase in the area of

the anchor region to decrease alignment problems.

164

Page 186: Polymer MEMS

Figure 9.10 Images of (a) final design of the second generation compound beam (b) 4 probe device (c) 6 probe device, (d) 8 probe device, and (e) 10 probe device.

165

Figure 9.11 shows an example of the progression of the finite element simulations

for the second generation device. The geometry of the beam was first imported from

Page 187: Polymer MEMS

SolidWorks. The boundary conditions were established by placing a fixed support at the

end of the beam and the load was applied to top surface of the free end of the beam

[Figure 11(a)]. The mesh was then defined as shown in Figure 9.11(b). After imputing

the material properties, the simulation was run to solve for the x and y deflections of the

beam [Figure 11(c)]. The angle of the force input was then changed in 30º increments and

the simulation and analysis was repeated over 360º. The deflection of the end of the

cantilever was analyzed and used to create the deflection plots.

166

Figure 9.11 FEA simulations; (a) boundary condition and applied force, (b) mesh, and (c) deflection solution.

Page 188: Polymer MEMS

The x,y deflection plot for the second generation beam is shown in Figure 9.12.

The plot shows the profile for 5 nN, 10 nN, and 20 nN forces. The plot shows that there is

significantly less offset between the deflection direction and force direction. While the

plot is still elliptical, it is much closer to circular than the first generation device. This

gives a more uniform sensitivity to forces in any direction. A comparison between the

first and second generation beams is shown in Figure 9.13. The plot shows the

differences in the deflection profile for a 5 nN force. Improvements to the offset and the

uniformity are obvious. Sensitivity of the device is reduced in the direction corresponding

to 0º and 180º relative to the sensitivity of the first generation device. The overall

uniformity in the sensitivity is improved, thus providing better measurement of forces

independent of direction. The deflection profile for the second generation device also

improves the ability to resolve the force direction.

-1

-0.5

0

0.5

1

-1 -0.5 0 0.5 1

y-deflection (µm)

x-de

flect

ion

(µm

)

5 nN10nN20 nN

Pos.1

Pos.4

Pos.7

Pos.10

Figure 9.12 Deflection plot for second generation compound beam. 167

Page 189: Polymer MEMS

-0.75

-0.50

-0.25

0.00

0.25

0.50

0.75

-0.75 -0.50 -0.25 0.00 0.25 0.50 0.75

x-de

flect

ion

(µm

)

y-deflection (µm)

Initial L-beamresponse

secondgeneration beamresponse

Figure 9.13 Comparison of the beam deflection response for the L-beam and second generation beam designs.

Fabrication results for the second generation devices are shown in the Figure 9.14.

The SEM micrographs show PPMA sensors with (a) 4, (c) 6, and (e) 10 probe

configurations. Figure 9.14(b,d,f) shows SEM micrographs of devices fabricated from

polystyrene. Polystyrene replaced PPMA as the structural material in order obtain a well-

understood and biocompatible surface for cell attachment. Figure 9.15 shows phase

contrast micrographs of immersed polystyrene sensors after release of the sacrificial

layer.

168

Page 190: Polymer MEMS

Figure 9.14 SEM micrographs of cell force sensors; (a,b) four probe sensors, (c) six probe sensor, (d) eight probe sensor, (e,f) ten probe sensors. The devices in the left

column are made from PPMA and the right column are made of polystyrene.

169

Page 191: Polymer MEMS

Figure 9.15 Phase contrast optical micrographs of (a) 4 probe sensor, (b) 10 probe sensor, and (c) 6 probe sensor after releasing the sacrificial layer in aqueous solution.

9.3.5 Third generation cell force sensor

Improvements to the sensor design for the third generation were primarily driven

by improving the biological interactions between the cell and the device. Initial

experiments with the second generation device revealed that significant improvements

could be made to improve the cells’ ability to attach, spread, and function normally on

the devices. Changes were made primarily to the cell active area. First, an adhesion pad

was placed in the center of the device and fixed to the substrate in the same manner as the

anchor region. This adhesion pad was designed to provide the cell with a surface for

initial attachment. The size of the pad was determined based on cell area measurements

taken from two cell lines of interest: HT 1080 fibrosarcoma cells and 3T3 mouse

170

Page 192: Polymer MEMS

fibroblasts. The pad area was designed to provide a surface for cell attachment by also

allow the cell to bridge between the pad and the cantilevers during cell spreading. The

area of the end of each cantilever was also increased to provide a larger area for the cell

to spread. It should be noted that all of the final experiments were performed with WS-1

skin fibroblasts instead of either of the cell lines that were analyzed. However, these

measurements gave a good estimate of the area needed to promote healthy cell behavior

on the sensor. Cell area measurement for HT 1080 and 3T3 cells are shown in Figure

9.16. The projected cell area for unattached cells and for cells after 12 hours of

attachment are given. Based on these measurements, the areas of the adhesion pads that

were chosen for the fabrication run were 400 µm2 (4 probe sensors-design 1), 420 µm2 (6

probe sensor-design 1), and 625 µm2 (4 and 6 probe sensors-design 2).

0

100

200

300

400

500

600

700

800

900

t=0 min. t=720 min.

Proj

ecte

d C

ell A

rea

(µm

2)

HT10803T3

Figure 9.16 Projected cell area for HT1080 and 3T3 cells before attachment (t=0 min.) and after spreading (t=720 min.).

171

Page 193: Polymer MEMS

Even though the basic geometry of the beam was not changed for the third

generation sensors, the increase in the size of the pad led to a decrease in the overall

length of the 5 µm wide section of the beam. This had a significant impact of the force-

deflection behavior, making it necessary to perform new FEA simulations and produce

new force-deflection plots for the third generation device. It should be noted that the

angle convention was changed for the simulations of the third generation device. The

angle convention is shown in Figure 9.17. The change in the angle convention only

changes the appearance of the profile (i.e. the orientation of the profile). It is critical,

however, that the same convention is maintained when experimental data is analyzed.

Figure 9.17 Angle convention for third generation device simulations.

Additional FEA simulations were run to determining the effects of the area and

location of the applied load, the location on the beam that the deflection is analyzed, and

the pad area on the deflection profile. Four different loading scenarios were tested as

shown in Figure 9.18. The figure shows the load applied to a (a) 5 µm diameter circular

area at the center of the pad, (b) 5 µm diameter circular area at the end of the pad, (c) line

at the end of the pad, and (d) the area of the front half of the pad. The difference in the

172

Page 194: Polymer MEMS

deflection profile for each of the different loading conditions is shown in Figure 19. The

plot does show a small difference in the behavior depending on the loading conditions. It

was determined that the load of the front half of the pad area would be used in the

analysis. This condition was chosen for two reasons. First, this loading condition seems

to fit most appropriately with the actual behavior of a cell on the device. Second, this

produces a response in the middle of the two extremes, thus providing a reasonable

estimation of the loading.

Figure 9.18 FEA loading conditions; (a) load applied to a 5 µm diameter circle at the center of the pad, (b) load applied to a 5 µm diameter circle at the center of the pad, (c)

load applied to the front edge line of the pad and (d) load applied to the front half area of the pad.

173

Page 195: Polymer MEMS

-0.2

-0.15

-0.1

-0.05

0

0.05

0.1

0.15

-0.2 -0.1 0 0.1 0.2

x-deflection

y-de

flect

ion

0.2

(a)(b)(c)(d)

Figure 9.19 Deflection plot for four different loading conditions; (a),(b),(c), and (d) correspond to the loading conditions in Figure 9.18.

The location on the cantilever where the deflection was measured was also tested

to determine if different locations affect the profile. The left and right side of the tip of

the cantilever were tested. These locations were chosen because they give the largest

displacement for a given force. The locations that were tested are shown in Figure 9.20(a)

and the difference in the profile is shown in (b). The plot shows that there is a difference

in the profile, with the right side measurement showing more deflection offset. Therefore,

the left side displacement was used for simulations and for all experimental

measurements.

174

Page 196: Polymer MEMS

-0.2

-0.15

-0.1

-0.05

0

0.05

0.1

0.15

0.2

-0.2 -0.15 -0.1 -0.05 0 0.05 0.1 0.15 0.2

x-deflection

y-de

flect

ion

Right SideLeft Side

(b)

Figure 9.20 (a) Convention for location of deflection analysis, (b) deflection plot for deflection analysis on the right and left side of the probe.

The area of the pad was also tested to determine if this had an effect on the

profile. This is important because the individual pad area is different for the 4 and 6

probe configurations. The profiles showed that the area of the pad did not have a

significant effect on the profile, provided that the length of the 5 µm wide section of the

beam was maintained constant.

A summary in the difference between the deflection plots for the first, second, and

third generation devices are shown in Figure 9.21. The angle conventions were

transformed into the convention of Figure 9.17 to allow for direct comparison of the

profiles. The first generation device showed significant angular offset between the force

175

Page 197: Polymer MEMS

direction and the displacement direction. The flat elliptical nature of the profile leads to a

higher device sensitivity in certain directions relative to others as well as lower resolution

in determining the force direction. The second generation device shows a significant

improvement in the profile, with better uniformity in the sensitivity for force in any

direction, decreased angular offset between the force and displacement direction, and

improved resolution in determining the force direction. The third generation device

shows that the overall beam is stiffer based on shortening the length of the 5 µm wide

portion of the beam. The profile shows even less angular offset between the force and

displacement directions based on choosing the most appropriate location to analyze the

displacement.

-0.400

-0.300

-0.200

-0.100

0.000

0.100

0.200

0.300

0.400

-0.600 -0.400 -0.200 0.000 0.200 0.400 0.600

x-deflection

y-de

flect

ion

Gen 1

Gen 2

Gen 3

Figure 9.21 Comparison of the deflection plot for first, second, and third generation cell force sensors.

176

Page 198: Polymer MEMS

Fabrication results for the third generation device are shown in Figure 9.22. A

lower magnification image of the overall device is shown in Figure 9.22(a). A higher

magnification SEM image (b) shows the cell active area with the increase in the size of

the beam ends and the inclusion of the central adhesion pad.

Figure 9.22 SEM micrographs of the third generation sensor at (a) low magnification and (b) high magnification.

9.3.6 Determining the force vectors from displacement data

To this point, the deflection profiles have been given only for a few specific

forces. For practical experimental purposes, it is necessary to calculate the force

magnitude and force direction from deflection measurements over a wide range of

magnitudes and directions. This was done in three basic steps. First, the x,y deflection

plot was made from FEA simulations at 10º increments in the force direction in the same

manner described previous. The deflection plot is given in Appendix A. The x,y

deflection data points were used to calculate the deflection angle for each simulated force

direction. The force angle was then plotted versus the beam angle. Parabolic curves were

fit to the data over a range of angles that provided a R2 value for the curve fit > 0.998. An

177

Page 199: Polymer MEMS

example for beam angles between 1.6º and 27.6º is shown in Figure 23. The plots for the

remaining angles are given in the Appendix A. This provided a set of equations to

transform the experimentally determined beam deflection angle into the force direction

angle. The set of equations is also available in Appendix A. The calculated force

direction is then used in the next step to calculate the magnitude of the force.

y = -0.055914x2 + 3.937841x - 6.182234R2 = 0.999931

0

10

20

30

40

50

60

70

0 5 10 15 20 25 30

Beam Deflection Angle (°)

Forc

e A

ngle

(°)

Figure 9.23 Plot of force angle versus beam deflection angle from FEA simulations. The experimentally determined beam angle can then be used to calculate the force angle.

The next step in the process was to calculate the magnitude of the simulated beam

deflection by simply taking the sum of the squares of the x,y deflection for a specific

force magnitude (i.e. 5 nN). The magnitude of the beam deflection was then plotted

versus the force angle for a specific range of force angles. Parabolic curves were fit to

this data such that R2 > 0.998 over the force direction range. An example for force angles

from 0-60º is shown in Figure 9.24. The remaining plots and equations are given in

Appendix A. This gives a set of equations to calculate the expected deflection magnitude

178

Page 200: Polymer MEMS

per unit force in a given direction. Since the deflection magnitude scales linearly with the

force magnitude, the magnitude of the force can be calculated by taking the

experimentally determined deflection divided by the simulated deflection per unit force.

y = -0.00001578x2 - 0.00026049x + 0.15466464R2 = 0.99959381

0.00

0.02

0.04

0.06

0.08

0.10

0.12

0.14

0.16

0.18

0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70

Force Angle (°)

Bea

m D

efle

ctio

n (µ

m)/5

nN

Figure 9.24 Plot of beam deflection per 5 nN of force versus the angle of the force.

The final step in the process was to correct the force magnitude for other variables

including the elastic modulus and the beam thickness. Since the force magnitude scales

linearly with elastic modulus, it was possible to correct for the elastic modulus by simply

multiplying the magnitude of the force by the ratio of the actual modulus to the modulus

used in the FEA simulation. The force magnitude does not scale linearly with the beam

thickness. To account for this factor, FEA simulations were performed for a range of

179

Page 201: Polymer MEMS

thicknesses (1-10 µm) at a specific force angle (i.e. 0º). The magnitude of the deflection

was then calculated from the x,y deflection data. The magnitude of the deflection was

then normalized to the deflection at a beam thickness of 3 µm. The normalized deflection

was then plotted again the beam thickness. An exponential curve was fitted to the data.

The equation for the curve could be used to calculate a correction factor to account to the

beam thickness. The magnitude of the force could then be calculated by dividing the

uncorrected force magnitude by the correction factor.

In summary, a methodology for calculating the force magnitude and direction

from experimental deflection data was given. This is done by first calculating the

direction of the force from the experimentally determined beam deflection angle. The

force magnitude is then calculated from the previously determine force angle, the

experimentally determined beam deflection magnitude, and the expected deflection per

unit force at a given force angle. The force magnitude was then corrected for elastic

modulus and beam thickness. The beam thickness correction factor was determined by

running FEA simulations over a range of beam thicknesses.

All of the equations for calculating the force vector and the correction factors

were integrated into an Excel spreadsheet. The spreadsheet was configured such that the

angle of the probe deflection and the magnitude of the deflection could be input into the

spreadsheet. Then for a given material and beam thickness, the angle and magnitude of

the force were automatically calculated. The layout of the spreadsheet is given in the

Appendix A.

180

Page 202: Polymer MEMS

9.4 Conclusion

A cantilever sensor for measuring forces generated by single adherent cells was

designed with the aid of SolidWorks 3-D CAD software and ANSYS finite element

simulations. The design consists of an array of cantilevers with a specific geometry to

allow for flexibility in measuring force in multiple directions with high sensitivity. A

number of other design consideration were also taken into account during the

development process. Some of the other key factors included ease of fabrication, material

properties and biocompatibility, and cost.

Three generations of the devices were designed with functional and biological

improvements being made for each generation. A much improved beam response was

achieved for the second generation device by considering the response behavior of the

first generations beam (L-beam) and performing an iterative design with the aid of FEA.

The third generation device was re-designed with biological improvement being the

primary goal. The simulated behavior of each device was discussed in detail along with

the methodology for determining force vectors from experiment data. Fabrication of each

generation of the force sensor was demonstrated.

References 1 C.G. Galbraith, M.P Sheetz, “Forces on Adhesive Contacts Affect Cell Function.” Current Opinions in Cell Biology 10 (1998) 566-571. 2 A. Yamamoto, S. Mishim, N. Maryuama, M. Sumita, “A new technique for direct measurement of the shear force necessary to detach a cell from a material.” Biomaterial 19 (1998) 871-879. 3 K.A. Athanasiou, B.S. Thoma, D.R. Lanctot, D. Shin, C.M. Agrawal, R.G. LeBaron, “Development of the cytodetachment technique to quantify mechanical adhesiveness of a single cell.” Biomaterial 20 (1999) 2405-2415.

181

Page 203: Polymer MEMS

4 C.G. Galbraith, M.P. Sheetz. “A micromachined device provides a new bend on fibroblast traction forces.” Proceeding of the National Academy of Sciences USA 94 (1997) 9114-9118. 5 J.L. Tan, J. Tien, D.M. Pirone, D.S. Gray, K. Bhadriraju, C.S. Chen, “Cells lying on a bed of microneedles: An approach to isolate mechanical force.” Proceeding of the National Academy of Sciences USA 100 (2003) 1484-1489. 6 R.M. Hochmuth, “Micropipette aspiration of living cells.” Journal of Biomechanics 33 (2000) 15-22. 7 D.A. Stenger, G.W. Gross, E.W. Keefer, K.M. Shaffer, J.D. Andreadis, W. Ma, J.J. Pancrazio, “Detection of Physiologically Active Compound Using Cell-based Biosensors.” Trends in Biotechnology 19 (2001) 304-309.

182

Page 204: Polymer MEMS

CHAPTER 10

BIOLOGICAL TESTING OF THE POLYMER MEMS CELL FORCE SENSOR

10.1 Introduction

Recent research has shown that cell forces are critical in regulating a host of

cellular processes1,2,3. Cytoskeletal components are responsible for regulating cellular

shape and spreading. Integrin rich focal adhesions provide a molecular linkage between

the intracellular and extracellular spaces that is imperative for establishing bi-directional

signal transduction pathways2,6. Adhesion forces at the cell membrane-substrate interface

are also responsible for remodeling the extracellular matrix. Transient changes in the

adhesion forces and the intracellular stress field are the primary mechanism of cellular

motility4,5,7. Cellular adhesion forces also have implication in tissue engineering and

biomaterials. The degree and strength with which cells adhere to tissue engineering

scaffolds and implant materials can be the limiting factor in their functional effectiveness.

By employing a polymer MEMS approach to measure cell forces, a better understanding

of the fundamental role of cellular mechanics in regulating cellular processes can be

obtained.

In addition to normal cell function, abnormalities is the cytoskeleton have been

implicated in a wide range of pathologies.8 Cytoskeletal protein abnormalities have been

associated with muscular and neurodegenerative disease, 9,10 cancer,11-13 infectious

183

Page 205: Polymer MEMS

disease14 and pathologies of the immune systems,15 among others. A better understand of

the cytoskeleton and cytoskeletal mechanics could lead to improved diagnostic and

therapeutic approaches to these diseases. Cytoskeletal proteins, especially actin, also play

a critical role in would healing.16,17

There are already a number of drugs and chemicals that directly target

cytoskeletal components. Prime examples are chemotherapeutics that target the

microtubule network to impede cell proliferation. Paclitaxel (Taxol) is a commonly used

drug for treatment of ovarian, breast, and lung cancer. Paclitaxel stabilizes the

microtubule network, thus inhibiting cell division.18 Another set of microtubule targeting

anticancer drugs are the vinca alkaloids. While they function via a different mechanism

of action than Taxol, this class of drugs also inhibits cell mitosis.19 Other chemicals,

including the cytochalasins20, phalloidon20, and jasplakinolide21, target the actin network

and affect polymerization and depolymerization of actin filaments. The ability to directly

test how these and other drugs affect cell mechanics could improve the therapeutic

effectiveness of the drugs, lead to new applications of cytoskeletal targeting agents in

disease therapy, and potentially provide a new avenue to drug testing and environmental

monitoring.

Here we describe measurement of fibroblast cell forces using the polymer MEMS

sensor described in the previous chapter. Sample preparation, experimental setup, and

testing procedure will be described. WS-1 skin fibroblast cells were tested. Forces were

measured with the second and third generation devices. Third generation devices were

used to measure dynamic force by analyzing time lapse images. The ability to measure

cellular response to chemical perturbations was demonstrated by exposing the cell to

184

Page 206: Polymer MEMS

cytochalasin-D and measuring the force response over time. This work demonstrates the

ability to use the polymer MEMS force sensor to measure dynamic cellular forces and

measure chemically induced changes in cellular mechanics. This device could find

applications in various cell biology studies, chemomechanical transduction studies, and

drug and chemical testing.

10.2 Materials and method

10.2.1 Sample preparation and surface modification

Initial experiments with PPMA were performed without any surface modification.

After changing to polystyrene, the sample surface was modified with an oxygen plasma

to promote cell adhesion. The devices were expose to O2 plasma in a benchtop reactive

ion etcher (Technics, MicroRIE 800). Samples were exposed for ten seconds with a

power of 100 W, O2 flow rate of 30 sccm, and pressure of 187 mTorr. Sample beams

were characterized by AFM before and after exposure to O2 plasma to determine if the

treatment had a significant effect on the beam thickness or roughness.

After O2 plasma treatment, the samples were placed in PDMS coated petri dishes.

The dishes were coated with a thin layer of PDMS to fix the samples in place during

testing. PDMS was used to avoid using any additional adhesives that could be toxic to the

cells. PDMS was prepared by mixing a 10:1 ratio of PDMS T-2 translucent base and T-2

curing agent. The PDMS was mixed thoroughly and a small amount was placed in the

dish and spread evenly. The PDMS was allowed to cure for a minimum of 48 hours. The

PDMS was sterilized with 70% ethanol for at least 30 minutes before use.

185

Page 207: Polymer MEMS

The surface modified devices were place in the PDMS coated dishes and cell

culture medium was added to the dish within 30 minutes of modification. The O2 plasma

surface modification is not stable over time, so devices were modified immediately

before testing. The petri dish was placed in the cell culture incubator at 37 ºC to promote

dissolution of the PVA sacrificial layer. After completely dissolving the sacrificial layer,

the cell culture was serially diluted three times. A majority of the medium was aspirated

from the dish and fresh medium was added. This was done to avoid drying the device

completely which would lead to collapse of the beams due to stiction.

10.2.2 Experimental setup

186

The experimental setup for testing the sensor is shown in Figure 10.1. The overall

setup is shown in Figure 10.1(a) and a close-up of the sample stage and micromanipulator

is given in Figure 10.1(b). The key features of the experimental setup are labeled. An

inverted phase contract microscope (Nikon, TS 100) was used for observation. The

microscope was placed on a vibration isolation platform [World Precision Instruments

(WPI)]. A custom built Plexiglas enclosure was fitted to the microscope. The images in

Figure 10.1 are shown with the doors of the enclosure removed to allow the setup to be

seen more clearly. Teflon tubing was used to connect a gas cylinder containing a blood

gas mixture (5% CO2, 20% O2, 75% N2) to a bulkhead fitting on the enclosure. A heat

source was placed in the enclosure to maintain the temperature at approximately 37 ºC. A

thermometer/hygrometer probe was placed in the enclosure to monitor the temperature

and humidity throughout the experiment. A three axis manual micromanipulator (WPI,

KITE-R) was used to place the cell in the cell active area of the device. The

micromanipulator was fixed to the vibration stage using a magnetic holding stand (WPI,

Page 208: Polymer MEMS

M10L). A 2 µm inside diameter glass micropipette with a Luer fitting (WPI, µTipTM) was

prefilled with cell culture medium using a micropipette filling needle (WPI, MicroFilTM).

The micropipette was attached to a 10 mL syringe via Tygon tubing. The micropipette

was placed in the micropipette holder arm and attached to the micromanipulator. A high

resolution (6.6 megapixel) digital camera (Pixelink, PL-A782) was attached to the

microscope. The camera was attached to a computer with digital image acquisition

software (PixeLINK Capture.OEM).

Figure 10.1 Experimental setup for cell force measurements. 187

Page 209: Polymer MEMS

10.2.3 Cell culture techniques

WS-1 human skin fibroblasts (ATCC) were used for testing. The cells were

cultured in T-75 or T-25 tissue culture flasks (Fisher Scientific) in Eagle’s Minimum

Essential Medium supplemented with 10% fetal bovine serum (FBS, ATCC) and 1%

penicillin-streptomycin (ATCC). For subculturing, the medium was aspirated from the

flask. Cells were detached with 0.25% trypsin-EDTA (ATCC) at 37 ºC. Fresh medium

was then added to the trypsin-EDTA solution and cells were centrifuged at 1200 rpm for

5 minutes. Trypsin containing medium was aspirated and cells were suspended in fresh

medium. The cell suspension was then split into the appropriate number of culture flasks

(cells were usually split at a 1:4 every 3-5 days). Cells were frozen and thawed as needed.

For sensor testing, the cells were detached from the culture flask in the same manner as

described previously. A small volume of cell suspension (~0.5 ml) was removed and

added to the petri dish with the sensors. The remaining cell suspension was either split or

placed back into a single flask depending on the cell density.

For studies with cytochalasin-D (Cyto-D, Calbiochem), the material was

dissolved in dimethylsulfoxide (DMSO). The cells were allowed to attach and spread on

the sensor as normal. Cyto-D was then injected into the medium via a 20 µl pipette to a

final concentration of 0.1 µM.

10.2.4 Cell placement

188

For testing, it was necessary to place a single cell on the cell active area. This was

done using the micropipette and three-axis micromanipulator. After adding the cell

suspension, the petri dish with sensors was immediately moved to the microscope stage

with the enclosure preheated to 37 ºC and flushed with cell culture gas. The micropipette

Page 210: Polymer MEMS

tip was place in the cell suspension and moved to a position just above the sensors. This

allowed the device and the micropipette tip to be imaged simultaneously through the

microscope optics. The difference in focal planes between the device and the

micropipette tip was used to estimate the distance between them to avoid damaging the

device with the tip or breaking the tip. After locating the appropriate cell, positive and

negative pressure applied via the syringe was used to move the cell to the center of the

device. The micropipette was then removed from the cell culture solution. After cell

placement, the enclosure was regularly flushed with cell culture gas to maintain the

proper gas concentration.

10.2.5 Image acquisition and analysis

After placing the cell on the device, digital images were captured at specific

intervals to monitor the deflection of the beams over time as the cell attached and spread

on the sensor. Images were captured using the digital image acquisition software. Images

were analyzed using ImageJ software. ImageJ is a free software download from the

National Institutes of Health and allows pixel mapping among a variety of the other

functions. The software can be downloaded from http://rsb.info.nih.gov/ij/.

189

For initial experiments, images were acquired in phase contrast mode. This

provided the best contrast between the device and the cell. However, this complicated

edge detection due to halos at the edges in the phase contrast images. For most of the

experiments with the third generation device, the cell placement was performed in phase

contrast mode then the microscope was switched to brightfield mode to capture the

images for analysis. Phase contract images were only taken for demonstration purposes

(i.e. Figures 10.3 and 10.9).

Page 211: Polymer MEMS

An initial image was acquired prior to cell attachment to determine the initial

locations of each of the beams. The images were analyzed by determining the x and y

pixel values for the tip of the beams. For the second generation devices, the end of the

arrow shaped pad was analyzed, and for the third generation devices the left side of the

end of the pad was analyzed (see chapter 9). A fixed point on each device was analyzed

to allow correction of any image shift, and a line between fixed points on the images was

also analyzed to ensure that there was no angular shift in the images. The subsequent

images were analyzed in a similar manner to determine the displacement of the beam

relative to the initial position. After correcting for image shift, these values were used to

calculate the pixel displacement magnitude and angle of displacement. The pixel

displacement magnitude was then converted to distance using the calibration factor for

the microscope at a specific magnification. The majority of the images were captured at

100x and the calibration factor was 3.6 pixels/µm. After determining the displacement

vector for each image, the force direction and magnitude were calculated according to the

procedure in Chapter 9.

10.3 Results and discussion

10.3.1 Sample preparation

Figure 10.2 shows the static contact angle of polystyrene films before and after

plasma surface modification. These values are compared with the static contact angle of

tissue culture treated polystyrene. The graph shows that the contact angle of native

polystyrene (94±1°) is much higher than that of tissue culture treated polystyrene

(46±2°). After modification, contact angle of the plasma treated polystyrene (31±2°)

190

Page 212: Polymer MEMS

surface had a contact angle even lower than tissue culture treated polystyrene. This

surface modification produces a surface similar to that of tissue culture treated

polystyrene and should provide a much more suitable surface for cell attachment and

spreading.

0102030405060708090

100

Polystyrene Tissue CulturePolystyrene

Plasma TreatedPolystyrene

Stat

ic C

onta

ct A

ngle

(°)

Figure 10.2 Static contact angle for native, tissue culture treated, and O2 plasma treated polystyrene.

AFM was used to determine if the plasma etch process had any significant effect

on the surface morphology or the height of the beam. AFM scans were performed on the

same area of the same beam before and after plasma exposure. The stepheight function of

the AFM image analysis software was used to measure the height of the beam before and

after exposure. In both cases, the beam was measured at 2.3 µm. Likely, there is a slight

etch due to the oxygen plasma exposure, but given the short exposure time (10 seconds) it

191

Page 213: Polymer MEMS

was not enough to produce a significant change in the beam dimensions. The images do

not show any noticeable change in the surface morphology. Overall, the plasma exposure

did not have a significant detrimental effect on the beam geometry.

10.3.2 Experimental results with first and second generation devices

Limitation in the experimental setup and the poor cell interactions with the first

generation device prevented any meaningful measurements from being performed.

However, lessons learned from the first generation device provided the necessary

foundation to improve the beam design, the microscope incubation system, and the image

acquisition setup.

Initial experiments with the second generation device were performed with

unmodified PPMA as the structural material. These experiment were not performed using

the stage incubator described previously. Instead, the samples were placed in a cell

culture incubator between images. This significantly complicated the image analysis

given that large horizontal, vertical and angular image shifts had to be corrected. This

procedure also limited the number of images that could be taken and analyzed. However,

these experiments did provide a proof of concept for the device functionality, as well as

providing further insight into improving the device design, experimental setup, and data

acquisition system. In addition, the first meaningful force measurements were

demonstrated.

192

Figure 10.3 shows phase contrast optical micrographs of a WS-1 skin fibroblast

on the PPMA sensor at times ranging from 0 minutes to 88 minutes. The probes are

labeled 1-4 to aid the discussion. The cell was able to attach and spread on three of the

four probes. At 49 minutes after cell seeding, the cell is still rounded, and there is little

Page 214: Polymer MEMS

observable deflection in the probes. There is evidence that the cell is beginning to attach

to probe 1 and extend some filopodia in various directions as indicated in Figure 10.3(b).

By 80 minutes, there is significant deflection of the beams. Probes 1 and 4 have been

pulled into contact with one another. There is also significant deflection of probes 1 and

2. By 88 minutes, probe 1 and 2 are also pulled into contact. Probe 3 was never engaged

during this experiment. The end of the cantilever was initially out of focus, which

indicates that it is not in the same focal plane as the other cantilevers or the cell. This is

likely due to damage during the fabrication, release, or cell seeding. Figure 10.4(a) shows

an overlay of the images at time=0 min. and time=88 minutes to show the relative

displacement of each beam more clearly. The results of the displacement analysis and

force calculations are shown in tables 10.1 and 10.2. The resulting forces are on the order

of hundreds of nanonewtons (nN).

193

Page 215: Polymer MEMS

Figure 10.3 Optical micrographs of WS-1 fibroblast on the second generation sensor at times (a) 0 min. (b) 47 min. (c) 80 min. and (d) 88 min.

Cell Force

Probe Direction (°) Magnitude (nN)

1 261 83

2 212 70

3 - -

4 269 177

Table 10.1 Cell force calculations for time=80 min. for the experiment corresponding to Figure 10.3.

194

Page 216: Polymer MEMS

Cell Force

Probe Direction (°) Magnitude (nN)

1 317 159

2 270 119

3 - -

4 270 286

Table 10.2 Cell force calculations for time=88 min. for the experiment corresponding to Figure 10.3.

10.3.3 Results with third generation sensors

Changes were made in both the design of the sensor and the material used in third

generation of the device. All devices were made from plasma modified polystyrene. In

addition to improving cell interactions with the device, this material is also much better

characterized with respect to its mechanical properties. This decreases the influence of

error due to estimation of the elastic modulus of the materials. The area of the cell

adhesion region was increased to allow the cell to spread more normally. In addition,

considerable process was made in improving the microscope incubation system and

image acquisition. This combination of improvements made it possible to make

significant process in acquiring meaningful, time resolved cell force measurements.

Figure 10.5 shows time lapse optical micrographs of a WS1 skin fibroblast on the

third generation device. The image in Figure 10.5(a) shows the cell after initial seeding

on the device. The rounded cell is easily visible on the device. At a time of 7.5 minutes,

the cell become less visible as it begins to attach and spread. By 15 minutes after seeding,

195

Page 217: Polymer MEMS

bending of all four of the beams can be observed. The magnitude of the bending increases

steadily until time 50 minutes, at which point the beams are in contact with one another

or with the adhesion pad.

196

Page 218: Polymer MEMS

Figure 10.4 Optical micrographs of WS-1 fibroblast on the third generation sensor at times (a) 0 min., (b) 7.5 min., (c) 15 min., (d) 22.5 min., (e) 30 min., (f) 37.5 min., (g) 45

min., and (h) 50 min.

197

Page 219: Polymer MEMS

The deflection of the beams was analyzed using image analysis. The direction of

the force was then calculated according to the FEA simulations. A plot of the magnitude

of the force versus time is given in Figure 10.5. The plot shows a steady increase in the

force on each beam over time. The plot indicates that the cell attached to the beam

relatively quick, with forces applied to three of the four beams 10 minutes after seeding

and forces on all four beams at 15 minutes after seeding. Forces were highest in beam 1

and reached a magnitude of 879 nN by 50 minutes. The maximum forces for the beams 2,

3, and 4 were 523 nN, 554 nN, and 761 µN, respectively. The maximum force on beams

2, 3, 4 were reach at times of 55, 45, and 50 minutes, respectively. A plot of the force

direction versus time is given in Figure 10.6. The plot shows that the forces are

concentrated in the direction between 80-120º. This indicated that the forces are directed

toward the center of the device for all four probes. This further validates that the

deflection of the beams is a result of contractile force exerted on the beams by the cells.

198

Page 220: Polymer MEMS

-200

0

200

400

600

800

1000

0 10 20 30 40 50 6

Time (min.)

Forc

e (n

N)

0

Probe 1 Probe 2 Probe 3 Probe 4

Figure 10.5. Force versus time plot for WS-1 fibroblasts on third generation sensor, plot corresponds to the pictures in Figure 10.4.

0

50

100

150

200

250

300

0 10 20 30 40 50 60 7

Time (min.)

Forc

e D

irect

ion

(°)

.

0

Probe 1 Probe 2 Probe 3 Probe 4

Figure 10.6 Force direction plot for WS-1 fibroblast cell corresponding to the force magnitude plot in Figure 10.5.

199

Page 221: Polymer MEMS

Figures 10.7 and 10.8 show the force direction and magnitude versus time plots

for another experiment. The force magnitude plot has several interesting features. First,

the force plot shows that the cell did not attached to the probe immediately and the cell

attached to the probes at different times. The cell began to exert forces on beam 1 at

approximately 30 minutes. The cell attached to probe 4 at around 40 minutes, probe 3 at

around 50 minutes. The maximum forces for beams 1, 3, and 4 were 1.00 µN, 0.90 µN,

0.16 µN, respectively. The forces on probes 1 and 3 were considerably higher than those

on probe 4. This is likely due primarily to the area of the cell that covered the beam. For

example, if the cell were off-center or only attached to the edge of the beam, one would

expect the forces on that beam to be much lower than if the cell spread over a large area

of the beam surface.

The cell did not attach to probe 2. Even though there are no forces exerted on

probe 2, this does give a good illustration of the noise in the measurements. The positive

and negative values were assigned to give a reference to the direction, with measurements

between 0º and 180º (i.e. toward the center of the device) assigned positive values and

forces between 180º and 360º (i.e. away from the center of the device) assigned negative

values. The plot shows that the force measurements on probe 2 fluctuated between

positive and negative values, further indicating that the measurements are due to noise

and not to actual forces exerted on the beam. The range of measured values was –42 to

+17 nN, so the range of the noise is approximately 60 nN in this case. It should be noted

that the images were captured at 100x magnification. If we assume that the noise is

primarily due to errors in image analysis, the noise range should decrease considerably

with increased image magnification.

200

Page 222: Polymer MEMS

-200

0

200

400

600

800

1000

1200

0.00 20.00 40.00 60.00 80.00 100.00 120.00 140.00 160.00Time (min.)

Forc

e (n

N)

Probe 1 Probe 2 Probe 3 Probe 4

Figure 10.7 Force magnitude versus time plot for a WS-1 skin fibroblast.

0

50

100

150

200

250

300

350

400

0.00 20.00 40.00 60.00 80.00 100.00 120.00 140.00 160.00

Time (min.)

Forc

e D

irect

ion

(°) .

Probe 1 Probe 2 Probe 3 Probe 4

Figure 10.8. Force direction versus time plot corresponding to the force magnitude plot of Figure 10.7.

201

Page 223: Polymer MEMS

The force direction plot in Figure 10.8 shows that after cell attachment, the forces

are concentrated toward the center of the device in the range between 70-110º. The plot

also shows that the force direction is essentially random for probe 2 and for the rest of the

probes prior to cell attachment. This is expected given that these measurements are due to

noise in the system.

202

Page 224: Polymer MEMS

0

200

400

600

800

1000

1200

1400

0.00 20.00 40.00 60.00 80.00 100.00 120.00 140.00 160.00 180.00 200.00

Time (min.)

Forc

e (n

N)

Probe 1 Probe 2 Probe 3 Probe 4(a)

0

50

100

150

200

250

300

350

0.00 20.00 40.00 60.00 80.00 100.00 120.00 140.00 160.00 180.00 200.00Time (min.)

Forc

e D

irect

ion

(°) .

Probe 1 Probe 2 Probe 3 Probe 4(b)

Figure 10.9 (a) Force and (b) direction versus time plots for a WS-1 fibroblast.

203

Page 225: Polymer MEMS

-200

0

200

400

600

800

1000

1200

0 50 100 150 200 250Time (min.)

Forc

e (n

N)

Probe 1 Probe 2 Probe 3 Series4(a)

0

50

100

150

200

250

300

350

400

0 50 100 150 200 250Time (min.)

Forc

e D

irect

ion

(°) .

Probe 1 Probe 2 Probe 3 Probe 4(b)

Figure 10.10 (a) Force and (b) direction versus time plots for a WS-1 fibroblast.

Figures 10.9 and 10.10 show force magnitude and direction plots for several other

experiments. In each case, similar behavior is observed with respect to the force

magnitude and direction plots. The point of cell attachment on each probe can be seen by 204

Page 226: Polymer MEMS

the increase in the magnitude of the force. After a period of random noise in the angle of

the force, the direction stabilizes in the general direction toward the center of the device

as expected given the contractile nature of the forces.

10.3.4 Effects of chemical exposure on cell forces

One of the potential applications of the cell force sensor is in evaluating the

effects of drugs, toxins, and other chemicals on cell mechanics. In order to show that the

sensor is capable of measuring chemically induced changes in the cell forces, the cell was

exposed to cytochalasin-D (cyto-D). Figure 10.11 shows optical micrographs of a cell

that was seeded on the device and allowed to function normally on the device for

approximately one hour. The images show that the cell exerted normal contractile forces

with the beams being deflected in the general direction toward the center of the device.

At 57 minutes after seeding, the cyto-D solution was introduced into the system. After

injection of cyto-D, the images show that the beams began to move apart and away from

the center of the device, indicating a significant decrease in the force applied to each

beam. This is confirmed by image analysis and force calculations as shown in Figure

10.13. The force magnitude plot shows an increase in the forces on each beam over time.

The maximum force on each beam was calculated to be 462 nN, 378 nN, 224 nN, and

123 nN for beams 4, 2, 3, and 1, respectively. After injecting cyto-D, the forces on each

beam decrease significantly. By 150 minutes, the forces on each beam decreased to 33

nN, 35 nN, 66 nN, and 40 nN for beam 4, 2, 3, and 1, respectively.

205

Page 227: Polymer MEMS

Figure 10.11 Time lapse optical micrographs of cell forces before and after exposure to cytochalasin-D. The chemical was administered at 57 min. The time point for the images are (a) 0 min., (b) 30 min., (c) 50 min., (d) 70 min., (e) 90 min., (f) 110 min., and (g) 130

min.

206

Page 228: Polymer MEMS

0

5 0

1 0 0

1 5 0

2 0 0

2 5 0

3 0 0

3 5 0

4 0 0

4 5 0

5 0 0

0 2 0 4 0 6 0 8 0 1 0 0 1 2 0 1 4 0 1 6 0

T im e (m in .)

Forc

e (n

N)

P ro b e 1 P ro b e 2 P ro b e 3 P ro b e 4

C y to -D In jec tio n

Figure 10.12 Cell force magnitude versus time for a cell exposed to Cytochalasin-D. The chemical was injected at 57 minutes after seeding as indicated on the plot.

10.3.5 Sources of error and measures to minimize error

Errors in the measurement of the cell forces can be introduced in two main areas.

First, errors can be caused by materials and processing related factors. These include the

estimation of the elastic modulus and the measurement of the beam thickness. Despite the

fact that polystyrene is a fairly well characterized material, variations in the actual elastic

modulus of the material versus the value used in the simulations could still lead to some

error in the force calculations. The measurement of the beam thickness is also an

important factor. Each beam was measured individually and the beams should be quite

uniform in thickness given the fabrication processes used, so this factor should only lead

to a minimal amount of error. Finally, creep of the polystyrene during the experiment

could introduce a small amount of error into the system. These factors are difficult to

207

Page 229: Polymer MEMS

avoid. A direct calibration of the force-deflection behavior of the beams would eliminate

the need to estimate the elastic modulus; however, it is extremely difficult to find a good

calibration method for beams at this size scale and force measurement range. Therefore,

errors are likely to be introduced by the calibration process itself.

The second area that error can be introduced is in the image analysis. Errors in the

image analysis are the primary source of noise in the force magnitude plots and result in

errors in calculating both the force direction and magnitude. In order for the deflection

vector for the beam to be determined, a point at the end of each beam and a fixed point on

the device needed to be tracked over time. Ideally, the exact same pixel point on both the

end of the probe and the fixed point would be tracked consistently throughout the

analysis. However, given that the images were analyzed manually, an element of human

error is inevitably introduced into the system. One way to minimize this issue is to use

higher magnification images for analysis. For the first and second generation devices, the

images could be captured at a maximum magnification of 100x. This was a consequence

of not having any stationary points in the center of the device. This required that the

images have both the cell active area and the anchor region in the same image to provide

a reference point to correct for image shift. The fixed pad in the third generation device

not only serves as a point for cell attachment, but also provides a fixed reference point in

the image analysis. This allows the images to be collected at higher magnification. As a

result, each pixel represents a smaller surface area. Thus, errors in selecting the

appropriate pixel lead to less overall error in the measurement. A more sophisticated way

to deal with this issue would be to use an automated image analysis system. Not only

would this reduce the error in the pixel mapping process, it would also significantly cut

208

Page 230: Polymer MEMS

down on the time required for analysis. One downside of automated image analysis is the

high cost of the software.

10.4 Conclusion

The cell force sensor was tested using WS-1 skin fibroblasts as a model cells.

Various improvements were made from one generation of the device to the next in order

to improve the response of the beam and the behavior of the cell on the device. In

addition, various improvements were made to the experimental setup and the image

acquisition and analysis system. By the third generation of the device, time resolved

measurements of the cell force magnitude and direction could be made. In addition, the

effects of cytochalasin-D on cell force were determined. This is a significant step in the

implementation of the devices as a tool for evaluating the effects of drugs, toxins, and

other chemicals on cell mechanics.

References

1 C.G. Galbraith, M.P. Sheetz, “Forces on adhesive contacts affect cell function.” Current Opinions in Cell Biology 10 (1998) 566-571. 2 M.C. Beckerle, Cell Adhesion, Oxford University Press, Oxford (2001). 3 C.S. Chen, M. Mrksich, S. Huang, G.M. Whitesides, D.E. Ingber, “Geometic control of cell life and death.” Science 276 (1997) 1425-1428. 4 A.R. Horwitz, J.T. Parsons, “Cell migration—movin’ on.” Science 286 (1999) 1102-1103. 5 E. Crowley, A. Horwitz, “Tyrosine phosphorylation and cytoskeletal tension regulate the release of fibroblast adhesions.” Journal of Cell Biology 131 (1997) 525-537. 6 M. Chicurel, R. Singer, C. Meyer, D. Ingber, “Integrin binding and mechanical tension induce movement of mRNA and ribosomes to focal adhesions.” Nature 392 (1998) 730-733. 209

Page 231: Polymer MEMS

7 M.P. Sheetz, D.P. Felsenfeld, C.G. Galbraith, “Cell migration: regulation of force on extracellular-matrix-integrin complexes.” Trends in Cell Biology 8 (1998) 51-54. 8 F.C.S. Ramaekers, F.T. Bosman, “The cytoskeleton and disease.” Journal of Pathology 204 (2004) 351-354. 9 D. Paulin, A. Huet, L. Khanamyrian, Z. Xue, “Desminopothies in muscle disease.” Journal of Pathology 204 (2004) 418-427. 10 M. Pekny, M. Pekna, “Astrocyte intermediate filaments in CNS pathologies and regeneration.” Journal of Pathology 204 (2004) 428-437. 11 H. Yamaguchi, J. Condeelis, “Regulation of the actin cytoskeleton in cancer cell migration and invasion.” Biochimica et Biophysica Acta 1773 (2007) 642-652. 12 Z.Z. Wu, G. Zhang, M. Long, H.B. Wang, G.B. Song, S.X. Cai, “Comparison of the viscoelecastic properties of normal hepatocytes and hepatocellular carcinaoma cells under cytoskeletal perturbation.” Bioreology 37 (2000) 279-290. 13 M.J. Rosenbluth, W.A. Lam, D.A. Fletcher, “Force microscopy of nonadherent cells: a comparison of leukemia cell deformability.” Biophysical Journal 90 (2006) 2994-3003. 14 L.H. Miller, D.I. Baruch, K. Marsh, O.K. Doumbo, “The pathogenic basis of malaria.” Nature 415 (2002) 673-679. 15 Y. Calle, H.C. Chou, A.J. Thrasher, “Wiskott-Aldrich syndrome protein and the cytoskeletal dynamics of dendritic cells.” Journal of Pathology 204 (2004) 460-469. 16 G.D. Sempowski, M.A. Borrello, T.M. Blieden, K. Barth, R.P. Phipps, “Fibroblast heterogeneity in the healing wound.” Wound Repair and Regeneration 3 (1995) 120-131. 17 V.C. Sandulache, A. Parekh, H.-S. Li-Korotky, J.E. Dohar, P.A. Hebda, “Prostaglandin E2 differentially modulates human fetal and adult dermal fibroblast migration and contraction: implication for would healing.” Wound Repair and Regeneration 14 (2006) 633-643. 18 P.B. Schiff, S.B. Horwitz, “Taxol stabilizes microtubules in mouse fibroblast cells.” Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences USA 77 (1980) 1561-1565. 19 V.K. Ngan, K. Bellman, B.T. Hill, L. Wilson, M.A. Jordan, “Mechanism of mitotic block and inhibition of cell proliferation by the semisyntheic vinca alkaloids Vinorelbine and its newer derivative Vinflunine.” Molecular Pharmacology 60 (2001) 225-232. 20 J.A. Cooper, “Effects of cytochalasin and phalliodin on actin.” The Journal of Cell Biology 105 (1987) 1473-1478.

210

Page 232: Polymer MEMS

21 M.R. Bubb, I. Spectro, B.B. Beyer, K.M. Fosen, “Effects of jasplakinolide on the kinetics of actin polymerization.” The Journal of Biological Chemistry 275 (2000) 5163-5170.

211

Page 233: Polymer MEMS

CHAPTER 11

MEASUREMENT OF MECHANICAL FORCES GENERATED BY PLANT P-PROTEIN AGGREGATES (FORISOMES)

11.1 Introduction

Forisomes are small chemomechanically active P-protein aggregates uniquely

found in the sieve cells of legumes (Fabaceae). Unlike most other motor proteins,

forisomes do not rely on adenosine triphosphate (ATP) to supply the energy for

actuation.1 Instead they contract or expand in respond to changes in specific ion

concentrations or pH. Given their unique actuation mechanism and ability to produce

large conformational changes, forisomes have been suggested for use as micro-actuators,

drug delivery devices, or micro-valves.1,2

During forisome contraction, free chemical reaction energy is converted to

longitudinal and radial mechanical work and volume change. Upon exposure to Ca(II),

Sr(II), and Ba(II) ions or during pH shifts from 7.3 to 4.5 or 7.3 to 11.0, the protein

aggregates contract by 10 to 40% of their original length and increase their diameter by

as much as 150%.3 The stability of the energy conversion depends on the dissolved

oxygen concentration and can be considerably improved by working under anaerobic

conditions.

212

Page 234: Polymer MEMS

The focus of this chapter is the development of a sensor with the ability to

measure the forces generated by forisomes in both the lateral and radial directions.

Previous work from Knoblauch et al.1 and Schwan et al.4 show that the longitudinal

contraction forces are between 50 nN and 120 nN. However, there is a need for a more

refined force measurement device for measuring these forces in both the longitudinal and

radial directions. Our approach to measuring forisome forces was the development of a

microfabricated polymer cantilever sensor.

Polymers are being employed more frequently in micro/nanoscale devices. This is

often due to their unique physical, chemical, and mechanical properties. In this case,

using a polymer with a relatively low elastic modulus provides a cantilever structure that

gives relatively large and measurable deflections, even in response to relatively low

magnitude forces.

11.2 Materials and methods

11.2.1 Design

213

The layout of the device is shown in Figure 11.1. The structure consists of four

cantilever probes, each 250 µm in length and 5 µm wide. Two of the probes are designed

to measure the force in the longitudinal direction of the forisome, and the spacing of the

probes is 30 µm to match the typical geometry of the forisome in the extended

confirmation. Similarly, the other two probes measure force in the radial direction and

have a spacing of approximately 3 µm. The device is fixed to the substrate at the edges of

the structure and the cantilevers are suspended approximately 1 µm above the substrate

using a water soluble poly(vinyl alcohol) (PVA) sacrificial layer that is dissolved prior to

testing.

Page 235: Polymer MEMS

Figure 11.1 (a) Cantilever sensor for measuring forisome forces, (b) close-up of the measurement region, and (c) cross-section of the center region of the sensor.

11.2.2 Finite element simulations

The behavior of the device was simulated using finite element analysis (ANSYS).

A fixed support was placed at the base of the beam, and forces ranging of 0-600 nN were

applied to a 3x3 µm surface at the free end of the beam. An elastic modulus of 3.2 GPa

and Poisson’s ratio of 0.325 were used for polystyrene.5 It was assumed that the

mechanical properties of the material were similar to the bulk properties as reported in

the literature. Previous research on the mechanical properties of polystyrene using

nanoindentation indicates that this was a reasonable assumption.6

11.2.3 Fabrication and characterization

Devices were fabricated using sacrificial layer micromolding. This process is a

soft lithography7 based micromolding technique that is capable of producing suspended

214

Page 236: Polymer MEMS

polymer structures such as cantilevers. The details of the process are described

elsewhere.8 Briefly, the device geometry was defined in SU8 2005 (MicroChem.)

photoresist using standard photolithography. The structure was then transferred into

poly(dimethylsiloxane) (PDMS). After curing, the PDMS mold was spin coated at 3000

rpm with a 7.5% (wt/wt) solution of polystyrene dissolved in anisole. The resulting film

coated both the recesses and raised features of the mold. To remove the material from the

raised features of the mold, the surface was brought into contact with a glass slide heated

to 200 ºC. This removed the polymer from the top surface of the mold, resulting in a

mold that was selectively filled with polystyrene in the recessed features. The selectively

coated mold was then aligned and brought into contact with the patterned sacrificial

layer. Heat (125 ºC) and pressure (~0.35 MPa) were used to transfer the structure onto the

sacrificial layer. During testing, a water-based conditioning solution was introduced into

the measurement chamber. This solution dissolved the sacrificial layer and released the

cantilever beams.

11.2.4 Forisome preparation

The forisomes tested in this work were isolated from Vicia faba. They had

original lengths between 30 and 50 µm and diameters between 2 and 3 µm. Forisomes

were prepared by mechanically isolating phloem tissue from the stems of plants that were

4 to 6 weeks old. The rind between the first and seventh internodes of the plants was

excised and put into a Ca2+-free solution containing 10 mM EDTA, 0.1 M KCl, and 10

mM Tris adjusted to pH 7.3. The separated and pre-dried phloem tissue was powdered

215

Page 237: Polymer MEMS

under liquid nitrogen and subsequently suspended in a Ca2+-free solution. The suspension

was filtered through a nylon sieve with a mesh size of 55 µm.

11.2.5 Experimental setup

After isolating the forisomes, they were transfer to a storage chamber. The storage

chamber was connected by a transfer channel to the measurement chamber. The flow and

exchange of conditioning and rinsing solutions were adjusted by computer-controlled

piston pumps in the measurement chamber. Two plunger pumps were combined to stock

solutions, adjusting the concentrations of Ca2+ ions and EDTA to switch forisomes

between the calcium loaded and calcium free states.

The force measurement chip was fixed in the measurement chamber. The

forisomes were transferred from the storage chamber and attached to the devices using a

micropipette attached to a three-axis micromanipulator. With the exception of the pumps,

the entire measurement set-up was mounted on an actively damped optical bench.

11.2.6 Data acquisition and analysis

During Ca2+ induced actuation of the forisomes, images of the devices were

captured on a CCD camera attached to the microscope. The displacement of each probe

was analysed using a digital greyscale image correlation program (ARAMIS).

10.3 Results and discussion

A SEM micrograph of the device prior to removal of the sacrificial layer is shown

in Figure 11.2. The overall device is shown in Figure 11.2(a). The anchor region can be

seen at the outer edge of the device and the beams are suspended over the PVA sacrificial

216

Page 238: Polymer MEMS

layer. Figure 11.2(b) shows the central region of the device where the forisome is

attached. The spacings between the beams are labeled.

Figure 11.2 Scanning electron micrograph of the forisome sensors before release of the sacrificial layer, (a) full view and (b) close-up of the center measurement region.

217

Page 239: Polymer MEMS

Results from FEA simulations are compared with the analytical solution for beam

bending in Figure 11.3. The analytical solution assumes a straight beam 250 µm long

with a point load applied to the end of the beam. The solution for the area moment of

inertia (I) is given in equation 1. Note that since the beam is deflecting laterally, the width

of the beam is the squared term in the equation. The force-deflection plot was then

determined using the relationship in equation 2:9

12

3hbI = (1)

EIFld3

3

= (2)

where b is the width of the beam and h is the height of the beam in equation 1 and F is

the applied load, l is the beam length, E is the elastic modulus, d is the deflection and I is

the moment area of inertia for a rectangular beam cross section in equation 2. The

boundary condition for the FEA simulations assumes that the load is applied to a 3x3 µm

surface at the end of the beam. The differences between the analytical and numerical

solution are attributed to differences in the loading conditions and the assumption of a

straight beam in the analytical solution.

218

Page 240: Polymer MEMS

Figure 11.3 Comparison of the finite element and analytical solutions for the force-deflection behavior of the beam.

Figure 11.4 shows optical micrographs of the forisome attached to the sensor (a)

before and (b) after actuation with 10 mM Ca2+. The images show that the forisome

contraction resulted in a significant bending of the cantilevers in both the longitudinal

and radial directions. The net displacement of both of the beams in a given axis was then

used to calculate the corresponding force according to the finite element simulation.

219

Page 241: Polymer MEMS

Figure 11.4 Optical micrographs of the sensor (a) before and (b) after actuation with Ca2+.

Figure 11.5 shows an SEM micrograph of the sensor with a forisome attached.

The forisome was placed with the long axis between the cantilevers with the larger gap

spacing. No additional adhesives were used to attach the forisome to the sensor. The

natural adhesion of the forisome to polystyrene was sufficient to maintain contact

between the forisome and the sensor during the measurements. The SEM image was

taken after the device was used and dried. The label A in the image shows damage to the

220

Page 242: Polymer MEMS

device caused by the micropipette tip. The label B points out that the cantilevers in the

images were attached to the substrate. This was a result of stiction of the device during

the drying process. The cantilevers remained suspended while in an aqueous

environment.

Figure 11.5 SEM micrograph of a forisome on the sensor after testing. The notation A on the image indicates damage to the beam caused by forisome placement and B shows that

the beam collapsed during the drying process due to stiction.

The resulting forces for each of seven different forisomes are shown in Figure

11.6. The longitudinal force is plotted versus the radial force. The forces ranged from 84-

136 nN with an average force of 117±19 nN (± standard deviation) in the longitudinal

direction of the forisomes. Forces in the radial direction were 22-61 nN with an average

force of 43±14 nN. The variation in the force is primarily attributed to differences in the

geometry and behavior of the individual forisomes. The results for the longitudinal force

magnitudes are in qualitative agreement with previous estimations. This is the first time

that the lateral forces generated by forisomes have been measured. While the radial forces

221

Page 243: Polymer MEMS

are smaller relative to the longitudinal force, these forces are sufficiently large to be

functionally incorporated into a microscale actuator or valve system.

Figure 11.6 Plot of radial versus longitudinal force for seven experiments.

11.4 Conclusion

In summary, we were able perform parallel measurements of both the radial and

longitudinal forces generated by forisomes in response to stimulation by Ca2+. The forces

were measured using a unique polymer cantilever sensors. Forces ranged from 84-136 nN

in the longitudinal direction and 22-61 nN in the radial direction. The ability to quantify

the bi-directional forces generated by forisomes is an important step in applying these

materials as functional components in microdevices.

222

Page 244: Polymer MEMS

References 1 M. Knoblauch, G. A. Noll, T. Müller, D. Prüfer, I. Scheider-Hüther, A. J. E. van Bel, “ATP-independent contractile proteins from plants.” Nature Materials 2 (2003) 600-603. 2 M. Knoblauch, W. S. Peters, “Biomimetic actuators: where technology and cell biology meet.” Cell and Molecular Life Sciences 61 (2004) 2497-2509. 3 S. Schwan, M. Fritzsche, A. Cismak, A. Heilmann, U. Spohn, “In vitro investigation of the geometric contraction behavior of chemo-mechanical P-protein aggregates (forisomes). Biophysical Chemisty 125 (2007) 444-452. 4 S. Schwan (unpublished data).

5 J. Brandrup, E. H. Immergut, E. A. Grulke, Polymer Handbook, Wiley, New York, NY (1999). 6 M. Palacio, B. Bhushan, N. Ferrell. D. Hansford, “Nanomechanical characterization of polymer beam structures for BioMEMS applications.” Sensors and Actuators A 135 (2007) 637-650. 7 Y. Xia, G.M. Whitesides, “Soft lithography.” Angewandte Chemie International Edition 37 (1998) 550-575. 8 N. Ferrell, J. Woodard, D. Hansford, “Polymer microfabrication for MEMS: sacrificial layer micromolding and patterned substrate micromolding.” Biomedical Microdevices 9 (2007) 815-821. 9 R. C. Hibbeler, Mechanics of Materials, Prentice Hall, New York, NY, 4th Edition (1997).

223

Page 245: Polymer MEMS

CHAPTER 12

CONCLUSIONS AND FUTURE OUTLOOK

Polymer MEMS have potential for a wide range of applications. One of the more

promising areas is the biomedical field. The biocompatibility, diverse material properties,

and low processing costs can all be taken advantage of for development of polymer

biomedical devices. Several areas of polymer microdevices have already found

commercial success. Specifically, polymer microfluidic devices are widely used for

diagnostic and analytical applications. Other areas are less mature, and require new and

improved methods of efficient and cost effective fabrication of functional polymer

structures and components. In addition to development of new microfabrication

techniques, characterization of polymer mechanical properties at the micro and nanoscale

is critical for proper implantation of polymers as functional components in MEMS.

Finally, there are a wide range of specific biomedical areas where polymer MEMS can be

used for practical applications. By directly interfacing with cells and biomolecules on

their size scale, new areas of cell biology can be explored. Polymer microfabrication

techniques have and will continue to provide a means to develop biomedical tools for cell

biology. In addition, polymer microdevices provide an avenue to develop new sensor

technologies with unprecedented resolution and sensitivity. MEMS devices have also led

224

Page 246: Polymer MEMS

to new diagnostic and therapeutic techniques. Continued research in these areas will lead

to new and even more exciting developments in biomedical research and clinical practice.

The work presented in this thesis focused on three primary areas of polymer

MEMS research: (1) development of new polymer microfabrication techniques, (2)

characterization of these techniques and of the properties of potential polymer MEMS

materials, and (3) development of devices for specific biomedical applications. This led

to the characterization of the double stamp micromolding technique and the development

and characterization of four other novel polymer microfabrication techniques. Spin

dewetting was used to fabricate microstructure from PPMA, PMMA, and polystyrene.

The process is capable of fabricating structures with either the same or very different

geometry than the original PDMS mold features. Proper design of the mold and selection

of polymer solution and spin coating conditions allows tight control over the geometry of

the resulting microstructures. Lift-off processing using micromolded PPMA sacrificial

layers was used to pattern conducting sulfonated polyaniline. Sacrificial layer

micromolding and pattern substrate micromolding were developed to allow fabrication of

suspended, mechanically independent polymer microstructures such as cantilevers.

A comprehensive characterization of the mechanical properties of potential

polymer MEMS materials was conducted using nanoindentation techniques. A new

method for conducting microscale beam bending tests was developed and used to

measure the elastic modulus, yield strength, and breaking strength of PPMA, PPMA, PS,

and PS/clay nanocomposites beams. Conventional nanoindentation techniques were used

to measure hardness, elastic modulus, and scratch resistance of the materials. Polymers

were also tested at body temperature and after exposure to aqueous environment to

225

Page 247: Polymer MEMS

determine if these factors have a significant effect on material properties. Results showed

that only PPMA had a significant change in properties under these conditions.

Three new polymer MEMS devices were developed and tested. The first device is

a microfabricated cell isolation devices. The device consists of a microfabricated

membrane bonded to a commercially available nanoporous filter. The device allows

active manipulation and isolation of adherent cells, non-adherent cells, and cell clusters.

In the case of adherent cells, morphology of individual cells can be controlled based on

the shape and size of the individual microwells. For cell clusters, the cluster size can be

controlled by changing the size of the wells. Two polymer devices were developed for

measuring low magnitude biological forces. The cell force sensor was designed and

simulated using finite element analysis. The device was fabricated using sacrificial layer

micromolding. The cell force sensor was tested using fibroblasts cells and dynamic forces

were measured. The effects of chemical disruption of the cytoskeleton on cell forces were

also determined. The third device was a modified force sensor for measuring forces

generated by plant protein aggregates called forisomes. The forces generated by

forisomes in response to changes in calcium concentration were measured for the first

time in both the longitudinal and radial directions.

The field of polymer MEMS is still in its relative infancy. The fabrication

processes developed through this work could find applications in the development of a

wide range of polymer devices for biomedical and other applications. The cell isolation

device could find applications in liver cell biology, stem cell biology, and tissue

engineering just to name a few. The cell force sensor could be used as a tool for cell

biologist to study cytoskeletal mechanics in normal and diseased cells. The device could

226

Page 248: Polymer MEMS

also be used as a drug evaluation and testing method for drugs that target cytoskeletal

components. This basic method of force measurement could find broader applications in

sensors for other applications.

227

Page 249: Polymer MEMS

APPENDIX A

DESIGN AND SIMULATION DATA FOR THE CELL FORCE SENSOR

228

Page 250: Polymer MEMS

-0.2

-0.15

-0.1

-0.05

0

0.05

0.1

0.15

0.2

-0.2 -0.15 -0.1 -0.05 0 0.05 0.1 0.15 0.2

x-deflection (µm)

y-de

flect

ion

(µm

)

90°

180°

270°

Figure A.1 Deflection plot at 10º increments for third generation cell force sensor.

0

10

20

30

40

50

60

70

0 5 10 15 20 25 30

Beam Deflection Angle

Forc

e A

ngle

Figure A.2 Curve fits for calculating force angle from beam deflection angle. (Continued)

229

Page 251: Polymer MEMS

Figure A.2 Continued

0

10

20

30

40

50

60

70

80

90

0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70

Beam Deflection Angle

Forc

e A

ngle

0

20

40

60

80

100

120

0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140

Beam Deflection Angle

Forc

e A

ngle

(Continued)

230

Page 252: Polymer MEMS

Figure A.2 Continued

0

20

40

60

80

100

120

140

0 50 100 150 200

Beam Deflection Angle

Forc

e A

ngle

0

20

40

60

80

100

120

140

160

180

155 160 165 170 175 180 185

Beam Deflection Angle

Forc

e A

ngle

(Continued)

231

Page 253: Polymer MEMS

Figure A.2 Continued

0

50

100

150

200

250

300

175 180 185 190 195 200 205 210

Beam Deflection Angle

Forc

e A

ngle

235

240

245

250

255

260

265

200 210 220 230 240 250

Beam Deflection Angle

Forc

e A

ngle

(Continued)

232

Page 254: Polymer MEMS

Figure A.2 Continued

255

260

265

270

275

280

285

0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350

Beam Deflection Angle

Forc

e A

ngle

275

280

285

290

295

300

305

310

315

300 310 320 330 340 350

Beam Deflection Angle

Forc

e D

irect

ion

300

310

320

330

340

350

360

370

340 345 350 355 360 365

Beam Deflection Angle

Forc

e A

ngle

233

Page 255: Polymer MEMS

Beam Angle (°) Equation R2 1.62-27.62 f= -0.055914b2 + 3.937841b - 6.182234 0.99993127.62-62.04 f = -0.009885b2 + 1.467356b + 27.012935 1.00000062.04-127.45 f = 0.00038811b2 + 0.23221066b + 64.09965349 1.000000127.45-157.03 f = 0.013060b2 - 3.039140b + 275.204737 1.000000157.03-179.02 f = 0.0564224b2 - 16.6828923b + 1348.4376082 0.999936170.02-207.80 f = -0.0550594b2 + 23.7377278b - 2315.1491175 0.999961207.80-242.04 f = -0.00999159b2 + 5.07882517b - 383.93813498 1.000000242.04-307.45 f = 0.0003649b2 + 0.1052494b + 213.1488368 1.000000307.45-343.92 f = 0.017022b2 - 10.275335b + 1830.226010 0.998718343.92-1.62 f = 0.062337b2 - 41.131991b + 7,082.698040 0.999792 b=beam angle (°) f=force angle (°)

Table A.1 Summary of equations for calculating force angle from the beam deflection angle.

Beam Deflection/5nN for Force Angle 0-60

y = -0.00001578x2 - 0.00026049x + 0.15466464R2 = 0.99959381

0.000000000.020000000.040000000.060000000.080000000.100000000.120000000.140000000.160000000.18000000

0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70

Force Angle

Bea

m D

efle

ctio

n/5n

N

Figure A.3 Curve fits for calculating force and from beam deflection angle. (Continued)

234

Page 256: Polymer MEMS

Figure A.3 Continued

Beam Deflection/5nN for Angle 60-90

y = 0.00003404x2 - 0.00647351x + 0.34882960R2 = 0.99773130

0.000000000.010000000.020000000.030000000.040000000.050000000.060000000.070000000.080000000.09000000

0 20 40 60 80 100

Beam Deflection/5nN for Force Angle 90-120

y = 0.00002622x2 - 0.00397301x + 0.18712398R2 = 0.99853986

00.010.020.030.040.050.060.070.080.090.1

0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140

Beam Deflection/5nN for Angle 120-180

y = -0.00001731x2 + 0.00630147x - 0.41971182R2 = 0.99954678

0.000000000.020000000.040000000.060000000.080000000.100000000.120000000.140000000.160000000.18000000

0 50 100 150 200

(Continued)

235

Page 257: Polymer MEMS

Figure A.3 Continued

Beam Deflection/5nN for Force Angle 180-240

y = -0.00001638x2 + 0.00568310x - 0.33847476R2 = 0.99922685

0.000000000.020000000.040000000.060000000.080000000.100000000.120000000.140000000.160000000.18000000

0 50 100 150 200 250 300

Beam Deflection/5nN for Force Angle 240-270

y = 0.00003409x2 - 0.01876177x + 2.62208024R2 = 0.99762382

0.000000000.010000000.020000000.030000000.040000000.050000000.060000000.070000000.080000000.09000000

235 240 245 250 255 260 265 270 275

Beam Deflection/5nN for Force Angle 270-300

y = 0.00002621x2 - 0.01340333x + 1.75048365R2 = 0.99854329

0.000000000.010000000.020000000.030000000.040000000.050000000.060000000.070000000.080000000.090000000.10000000

265 270 275 280 285 290 295 300 305

(Continued)

236

Page 258: Polymer MEMS

Figure A.3 Continued

Beam Deflection/5nN for Force Angle 300-360y = -0.00001723x2 + 0.01249192x - 2.11000316

R2 = 0.99960531

0.000000000.020000000.040000000.060000000.080000000.100000000.120000000.140000000.160000000.18000000

290 300 310 320 330 340 350 360 370

Force Angle Equation R2 0-60 DF = -0.00001578f2 - 0.00026049f + 0.15466464 0.99959460-90 DF = 0.00003404f2 - 0.00647351f + 0.34882960 0.99773190-120 DF= 0.00002622f2 - 0.00397301f + 0.18712398 0.998540120-180 DF = -0.00001731f2 + 0.00630147f - 0.41971182 0.999547180-240 DF = -0.00001638f2 + 0.00568310f - 0.33847476 0.999227240-270 DF = 0.00003409f2 - 0.01876177f + 2.62208024 0.997624270-300 DF = 0.00002621f2 - 0.01340333f + 1.75048365 0.998543300-360 DF = -0.00001723f2 + 0.01249192f - 2.11000316 0.999605 f=force angle (°) DF=deflection/5nN force

Table A.2 Equations for calculating deflection per unit force from beam deflection angle.

237

Page 259: Polymer MEMS

Input Beam Direction (°) 90 Formula 0-27.62 0 -104.5702 27.62-62.04 0 79.0104 62.04-127.45 88.14131 88.14131 127.45-157.03 0 107.4717 157.03-179.02 0 303.981 179.02-207.8 0 -624.7421 207.8-242.02 0 -7.7813 242.04-307.45 0 225.57249 307.45-343.02 0 1043.311 343.02-360 0 3885.772 Cell Force Direction 88.14131 Input Probe Deflection (µm) 2.5 0-60 0.00 0.009146096 1366.703315 60.01-90 293.78 0.042548504 293.7823636 90.01-120 0.00 0.040614885 307.7689372 120.01-180 0.00 0.001198899 10426.23046 180.01-240 0.00 0.035152638 355.5920908 240.01-270 0.00 1.238698981 10.09123297 270.01-300 0.00 0.773029067 16.17015522 300.01-360 0.00 -1.142973022 -10.93639111 Cell Force Magnitude 293.78 Adjustments Modulus Correction Young's Modulus (MPa) 3300 293.7823636 Thickness Correction Beam Thickness (micron) 2.5 1.21 243.5810949 Width Correction Beam Width (micron) 6 1.00 243.5323884

Final Results Cell Force Direction (°) 88.14 Cell Force Magnitude (nN) 243.53

Table A.3 Excel program for calculating the cell force direction and magnitude of experimental beam deflection data.

238

Page 260: Polymer MEMS

APPENDIX B

POLYMER MICROFABRICATION AS A TOOL FOR PROCESSING INORGANIC MATERIALS

239

Page 261: Polymer MEMS

B.1 Introduction

The techniques described in this thesis have been geared toward fabrication of

polymer structures for biological applications. However, several of the basic processing

techniques have also been utilized effectively in processes ceramics, ceramic composites,

and other inorganic materials. This appendix will describe several processes that were

derived from the techniques given in the previous chapters.

B.2 Spin dewetting of PMMA etch masks for silicon wet etching

240

Chapter 4 describes the process of spin dewetting of polymer materials on PDMS

molds. In addition to being used directly in a device application, as was the case with the

cell isolation device in Chapter 6, the molded polymer structures can be used etch masks

for further silicon processing. PMMA has previously been suggested as a masking

material for silicon etching with potassium hydroxide (KOH) and tetramethyl ammonium

hydroxide (TMAH).1-3 Spin dewetting provides a simple method for depositing

micropatterned PMMA films to act as etch masks. We demonstrated the use of

micromolded PMMA as a etch mask for anisotropic etching of <100> silicon in TMAH.

Molding of polymer etch masks could significantly reduce both the time and cost of

silicon etching as compared to typical masking techniques. The low etch rate of PMMA

in TMAH and KOH makes it a strong candidate as a etch mask for silicon processing.3

However, delamination of the PMMA film during etching can be a significant problem.

We used baking techniques as well as silicon surface modification with

hexamethyldisilazane (HMDS) to increase the adhesion between silicon and PMMA.

While PMMA masking time was significantly increased for lower temperature etching

(60 ºC), the masking time was considerable less at higher temperatures (80 ºC). This

Page 262: Polymer MEMS

study suggests that PMMA patterned using this technique is adequate as an etch mask for

lower temperature silicon etching.

The etch process is shown in Figure B.1. The PMMA films were fabricated via

spin dewetting and pattern transfer with 8% (wt/wt) PMMA solutions in anisole spin

coated on the PDMS molds with 30 µm square pillars with height of 9 µm. The

substrates were placed in TMAH with constant stirring. After etching, the mask was

removed by sonication in acetone.

Figure B.1 Process for wet etching of silicon in TMAH using a micromolded PMMA etch mask.

241

Page 263: Polymer MEMS

Figure B.2 SEM micrographs of silicon after etching in TMAH.

Figure B.2 shows silicon after etching in 60 ºC TMAH for 270 minutes. PMMA

showed adequate adhesion for masking of silicon in 60 ºC TMAH for etch times up to

480 minutes. HMDS deposition and heat treatment were essential to increase the PMMA

adhesion. Samples that were not coated with HMDS or annealed showed PMMA

delamination after approximately 5 minutes. Samples that were only coated with HMDS

or only annealed had masking times of 120 minutes and 40 minutes, respectively.

Masking times were taken as the time needed to delaminate the PMMA from the silicon

substrate. While PMMA was effective for low temperature etching, as the TMAH bath

temperature was increased to 80 ºC, delamination occurred much more quickly, usually

within 30 minutes. These results indicate that PMMA molding using spin dewetting

could find applications in specific silicon etch processes, but is not suitable for all

applications.

B.2 Spin dewetting of inorganic materials on PDMS Molds

The spin dewetting process is not limited to organically soluble thermoplastic

polymers.4 Spin dewetting was also demonstrated using aqueous solutions of NaCl,

242

Page 264: Polymer MEMS

sucrose, ammonium heptamolybdate tetrahydrate, and poly-l-lysine. The crystal size or

particles size for NaCl and sucrose were characterized versus the solution concentration.

SEM micrographs of dewetted crystals of NaCl are shown in Figure B.3. A solution of

NaCl in DI water was spin coated on the mold at 3000 rpm for one minute. The mold

features were 10 µm diameter pillars with 10 µm spacing between pillars and height of

7.5 µm. Sucrose particles were formed using the same mold and spin coating process

(Figure B.4). Note the difference in the morphology of the resulting structures. NaCl

formed regular single cubic crystals while sucrose formed hemispherical particles. The

crystal or particle size versus concentration of the NaCl and sucrose are given in Figure

B.5. NaCl crystals as small as 600 nm were formed using low concentration solutions.

Figures B.6 and B.7 show particles of ammonium heptamolybdate tetrahydrate and poly-

l-lysine made using the same process.

243

Page 265: Polymer MEMS

Figure B.3 SEM micrographs of NaCl crystals formed by spin dewetting at (a) 0.5% NaCl, (b) 10% NaCl, and (c) 25% NaCl.

244

Page 266: Polymer MEMS

Figure B.4 SEM micrographs of sucrose particles formed by spin dewetting at (a) 0.5% sucrose, (b) 10% sucrose, and (c) 25% sucrose.

245

Page 267: Polymer MEMS

0

0.5

1

1.5

2

2.5

3

3.5

4

4.5

5

0 5 10 15 20 25 30

Concentration (%)

Cry

stal

/Par

ticle

Siz

e (µ

m) .

NaCl Sucrose

Figure B.5 Crystal/particle size versus concentration (wt/wt) for NaCl and sucrose dewetting on 10 µm diameter pillars at 3000 rpm.

Figure B.6 Ammonium heptamolybdate hydrate particles formed from 1% (wt/wt) solution.

246

Page 268: Polymer MEMS

Figure B.7 Poly-l-lysine particles formed from 0.1% (wt/wt) solution.

B.3 Peptide mediated deposition of silica and gold

In Chapter 5, double stamp micromolding was used to fabricate sacrificial layers

that were removed after in situ polymerization of sulfonated polyaniline. The basic

process of using micromolded structures as sacrificial layers can be applied to other

materials. PPMA sacrificial layers were used for patterned peptide deposition. The

patterned peptides were then used to template selective deposition of silica and gold from

solution. This process allows deposition of materials at ambient temperature and near

neutral pH on a wide range of substrates. Silica deposition has been demonstrated on

silicon, polyimide, iron, and nickel.

The process schematic is shown in Figure B.8. Sacrificial layers were deposited

using double stamp micromolding. Poly-l-lysine, 3X Flag peptide, and bovine serum

albumin (BSA) were adsorbed on the surface. The sacrificial layers were removed in

organic solvent. Silica and gold were then selectively deposited out of solution on the

247

Page 269: Polymer MEMS

surface of the peptide. Details of the silica and gold deposition process can be found

elsewhere.5,6

Figure B.9 shows an SEM micrograph of patterned silica deposition on polyimide

with corresponding energy dispersive spectroscopy (EDS) of the pattern and the

substrate. The ESD spectra show that the material on surface is silica as indicated by the

Si peak and the increase in the magnitude of the O peak. The spectra also indicate that the

deposition is selective to the regions with the patterned peptide, given that no Si peak

appears in Scan Area 1. Figure B.10 shows patterned gold nanoparticle deposition using a

3X Flag peptide template.

248

Page 270: Polymer MEMS

Figure B.8 Schematic diagram of peptide mediated materials deposition process.

249

Page 271: Polymer MEMS

Figure B.9 SEM of silica deposition on a poly-l-lysine template. EDS spectra show Si and an increased amount of O in the peptide coated region, and no Si is present in the

uncoated region.

Figure B.10 Gold nanoparticles deposited on a 3X Flag peptide template.

250

Page 272: Polymer MEMS

B.4 Sol-gel processing of silica and silica/hydroxyapatite nanoparticle composites

A simple sol-gel micromolding process was developed for fabricating

microstructures from silica and silica/hydroxyapatite nanoparticle composites. This could

have applications for surface modification of dental implants for improving cell

interactions. The process is shown in Figure B.11. A sol (with or without HA

nanoparticles) was applied to a substrate and a PDMS mold was applied to the surface

and held under pressure. The sol was allowed to gel, and the mold was removed. The

substrate was then sintered at 350 ºC for 30 minutes. Figure B.12 shows 5x5 µm line and

5 µm diameter pillar patterns made of silica. EDS was used to characterize the chemical

makeup of the patterns with HA particles. Figures B.13 shows SEM micrographs and

corresponding EDS spectra for silica/HA nanoparticles composites. The EDS spectra

indicate that HA particles are present in the line features and in between the features as

indicated by the presence of Ca and P peaks. The HA in the pillar features is difficult to

detect using EDS. This is likely due to the thickness of the pillar features. If the HA is

buried within the feature, it is difficult to detect via EDS.

251

Page 273: Polymer MEMS

Figure B.11 Schematic diagram of the sol-gel microfabrication process.

Figure B.12 SEM micrographs of (a) 5x5 µm lines, (b) 5 µm diameter pillars, and (c) cross section view of 5 µm diameter pillars.

252

Page 274: Polymer MEMS

Figure B.13 SEM micrographs and EDS spectra for silica/HA patterns.

253

Page 275: Polymer MEMS

A process was also developed to give semi-selective deposition of high

concentrations of HA particles within the features. In this case, the HA particles were

suspended in ethanol. The solution was applied to the patterned PDMS mold and dried. A

glass slide was used to spread the particle coating and move the particles into the

recessed features of the mold. Tape was used to remove the particles from the surface of

the mold. The sol was applied to the substrate and the particle coated mold was applied to

the surface. The gelation and sintering processes were repeated as described above. SEM

micrographs of line and pillar patterns are shown in Figure B.12 along with EDS spectra

of the features and in between the features. The spectra show significant Ca and P peaks

on the features but little or no Ca and P in between the features. While this indicates that

the process is reasonably selective with regard to the location of the HA particles, it is

still possible that some HA is present between the features, but not at high enough

concentration to be detected by EDS.

Cell culture studies with primary human bone marrow osteoblasts were performed

to access the effects of the micropatterns on cell behavior and morphology. Figure B.13

shows optical micrographs of cells grown on a line pattern and flat SiO2. The images

show that the lines induce significant changes in cell morphology, with cells aligning and

elongating in the direction of the lines. Similar behavior is seen in the SEM images in

Figure B.14. All patterns (i.e. line, pillars, and pillars with HA) induced significant

changes in cell shape and orientation, with cells exhibiting a long, narrow morphology

guided by the direction of the features.

254

Page 276: Polymer MEMS

Figure B.14 SEM micrographs and EDS spectra for silca/HA composites fabricated using semi-selective deposition.

255

Page 277: Polymer MEMS

Figure B.15 Optical micrographs of cells grown on (a) micropatterned lines and (b) flat SiO2.

Figure B.16 SEM micrographs of cells grown on SiO2 (a) lines, (b) pillars, and (c) SiO2/HA pillars.

256

Page 278: Polymer MEMS

References 1 M. Ilie, B. M„rculescu, N. Moldovan, N. Nastase, M. Olteanu, “Adhesion between PMMA mask layer and silicon wafer in KOH aqueous solution.” in Materials and Device Characterization in Micromachining, edited by C. R. Friedrich and Y. Vladimirsky, (Proc. of SPIE 3512, Santa Clara, CA, 1998) pp. 422-430. 2 D. S. Bodas, S. K. Mahapatra, and S. A. Gangal, “Comparative study of spin coated and sputtered PMMA as an etch mask material for silicon micromachining.” Sensors and Actuators A 120 (2005) 582-588. 3 D. S. Bodas and S. A. Gangal, “Poly(methyl methacrylate) as masking material for microelectromechanical system (MEMS) fabrication.” Journal of Applied Polymer Science 102 (2006) 2094-2098. 4 J. Guan, N. Ferrell, B. Yu, D.J. Hansford, L.J. Lee, “Simultaneous fabrication of hybrid arrays of nanowires andmicro/nanoparticles by dewetting on micropillars.” Soft Matter 3 (2007) 1369-1371. 5 R.T. Butler, N.J. Ferrell, D.J. Hansford, “Spatial and geometrical control of silicification using a patterned poly-L-lysine template.” Applied Surface Science 252 (2006) 7337–7342. 6 H. Borteh, N. Ferrell, R. Butler, S. Olesik, D. Hansford, “Electroless Deposition of Gold Nanoparticles Over Silicon-based Substrates.” in Materials, Processes, Integration and Reliability in Advanced Interconnects for Micro- and Nanoelectronics, edited by Q. Lin, E. T. Ryan, W. Wu, D.Y. Yoon, (Mater. Res. Soc. Symp. Proc. 990, Warrendale, PA, 2007) 0990-B08-17.

257

Page 279: Polymer MEMS

LIST OF REFEFNCES

1. W. Kern (ed.), Handbook of Semiconductor Wafer Cleaning Technology: Science, Technology, and Applications, Noyes, Park Ridge, NJ (1993).

2. A.G. Ernslie, F.T. Bonner, L.G. Peck, “Flow of a viscous liquid on a rotating disk.” Journal of Applied Physics 29 (1958) 858-862.

3. D. Meyerhofer, “Characteristics of resist films produced by spinning.” Journal of Applied Physics 49 (1978) 3993-3997.

4. D.C. Duffy, J.C. McDonald, O.J.A. Schueller, G.M. Whitesides, “Rapid prototyping of microfluidic systems in poly(dimethylsiloxane).” Analytical Chemistry 70 (1998) 4974-4984.

5. M. Mehregany, C.A. Zorman, “SiC MEMS: opportunities and challenges for applications in harsh environments.” Thin Solid Films 355-356 (1999) 518-524.

6. Y. Fu, H. Du, W. Huang, S. Zhang, M. Hu, “TiNi-based thin films in MEMS applications: a review.” Sensors and Actuators A 112 (2004) 395-408.

7. D. Niarchos, “Magnetic MEMS: key issues and some applications.” Sensors and Actuators A 109 (2003) 166-173.

8. M. Madou, Fundumentals of Microfabrication, CRC Press, Boca Raton, FL (1997) pp.171.

9. H. Janseny, H. Gardeniers, M. de Boer, M. Elwenspoek, J. Fluitman, “A survey on the reactive ion etching of silicon in microtechnology.” Journal of Micromechanics and Microengineering 6 (1996) 14-28.

10. Microelectromechanical Systems (MEMS) Technology: Current And Future Markets, BCC Research (2006).

11. Global MEMS/Microsystems - Markets and Opportunities, Yole Développement (2007).

258

Page 280: Polymer MEMS

12. W.H. Ko, “Trends and frontiers of MEMS.” Sensors and Actuators A 136 (2007) 62-67.

13. R.S. Shawgo, A.C. Richards Gradyson, Y.W. Li, M.J. Cima, “BioMEMS for drug delivery.” Current Opinions in Solid State Materials Science 6 (2002) 329-334.

14. A.C. Richards Grayson, R.S. Shawgo, Y. Li, M.J. Cima, “Electronic MEMS for triggered delivery.” Advanced Drug Delivery Reviews 56 (2004) 173-184.

15. S.L. Tao, T.A. Desai, “Microfabricated drug delivery systems: from particles to pores.” Advanced Drug Delivery Reviews 55 (2003) 315-328.

16. R. Bashir, “BioMEMS: state-of-the-art in detection, opportunities and prespects.” Advanced Drug Delivery Reviews 56 (2004) 1565-1585.

17. J. Santini, M.J. Cima, R.J. Langer, “A controlled-release microchip.” Nature 397 (1999) 335-338.

18. M. Staples, K. Daniel, M.J. Cima, R. Langer, “Application of micro- and nano-electromechanical devices to drug delivery.” Pharmaceutical Research 23 (2006) 847-863.

19. T.A. Desai, D. Hansford, M. Ferrari, “Characterization of micromachined silicon membranes for immunoisolation and bioseparation applications.” Journal of Membrane Science 159 (1999) 221-231.

20. T.A. Desai, W.H. Chu, G. Rasi, P. Sinibaldi-Vallebona, E. Guarino, “Microfabricated biocapsules provide short-term immunoisolation of insulinoma xenografts.”Biomedical Microdevices 1 (1999) 131-138.

21. J. Fritz, M.K. Baller, H.P. Land. H. Rothuizen, P. Vettiger, E. Meyer, H.-H. Güntherodt, Ch. Gerber, J.K. Gimzewski, “Translating biomolecular recognition into nanomechanics.” Science 288 (2000) 316-318.

22. G. Wu, R.H. Datar, K.M. Hansen, T. Thundat, R.J. Cote, A. Majumdar, “Bioassy of prostate-specific antigen (PSA) using microcantilevers.” Nature Biotechnology 19 (2001) 856-860.

23. A. Gupta, D. Akin, R. Bashir, “Single virus particle mass detection using microresonators with nanoscale thickness.” Applied Physics Letters 84 (2004) 1976-1978.

24. T.H. Schulte, R.L. Bardell, B.H. Weigl, “Microfluidic technologies in clinical diagnostics.” Clinica Chimica Acta 321 (2002) 1-10.

259

Page 281: Polymer MEMS

25. G.H.W. Sanders, A. Manz, ”Chip-based Microsystems for genomic and proteomic analysis.” Trends in Analytical Chemistry 19 (2000) 364-378.

26. Yu, X.; Zhang, D.; Li, T.; Hao, L.; Li, X. “3-D microarrys biochip for DNA amplification in polydimethylsiloxane (PDMS) elastomer.” Sensors and Actuators A 108 (2003) 103-107.

27. M.T. Cronin, T. Boone, A.P. Sassi, H. Tan, Q. Xue, S.J. Williams, A.J. Ricco, H.H. Hooper. “Plastic microfluidic systems for high-throughput genomic analysis and drug screening.” Journal of the Association for Laboratory Automation 6 (2001) 71-75.

28. H. Becker, C. Gärtner, “Polymer microfabrication methods for microfluidic analytical applications.” Electrophoresis 21 (2000) 12-26.

29. H. Becker, C. Gärtner, “Polymer microfabrication technologies for microfluidic systems.” Analytical and Bioanalytical Chemistry 390 (2008) 89-111.

30. Y. Xia, G.M. Whitesides, “Soft lithography.” Angewandte Chemie International Edition 37 (1998) 550-575.

31. C.S. Effenhauser, G.J.M. Bruin, A. Paulus, M. Ehart, Analytical Chemistry 69 (1997) 3451-3457.

32. J.S. Buch, P.-C. Wang, D.L. DeVoe, C.S. Lee, “Field-effect flow control in a polydimethylsoloxane based microfluidic system.” Electrophoresis 22 (2001), 3902-3907.

33. J.C. McDonald, D.C. Duffy, J.R. Anderson, D.T. Chiu, H. Wu, O.J.A. Scheuller, G.M. Whitesides, “Fabrication of microfluidic systems in poly(dimethylsiloxane).” Electrophoresis 21 (2000), 27-40.

34. S.K. Sia, G.M. Whitesides, “Microfluidic devices fabricated in poly(dimethylsiloxane) for biological studies.” Electrophoresis 24 (2003), 3563-3576.

35. J.M.K. Ng, I. Gitlin, A.D. Stroock, G.M. Whitesides, “Components for integrated poly(dimethylsiloxane) microfluidic systems.” Electrophoresis 23 (2002), 3461-3473.

36. X.-M. Zhoa, Y. Xia, and G.M. Whitesides, “Fabrication of three-dimensional micro-structures: microtransfer molding.” Advanced Materials 8 (1996) 837-840.

37. E. Kim, Y. Xia, and G.M. Whitesides, “Polymer microstructures formed by moulding in capillaries.” Nature 376 (1995) 581-584.

260

Page 282: Polymer MEMS

38. Y. Xia, G.M. Whitesides, “Soft lithography.” Annual Review of Materials Science 28 (1998) 153-184.

39. A. Kumar, G.M. Whitesides, “Features of gold having micrometer to centimeter dimensions can be formed through a combination of stamping with an elastomeric stamp and an alkanethiol “ink” followed by chemical etching.” Applied Physics Letters 61 (1993) 2002-2004.

40. R.S. Kane, S. Takayama, E. Ostuni, D.E. Ingber, G.M. Whitesides, “Patterning proteins and cells using soft lithography.” Biomaterials 20 (1999) 2363-2376.

41. J.A. Rogers, R.G. Nuzzo, “Recent progress in soft lithography.” Materials Today 8(2) (2005) 50-56.

42. M. Wang, H.-G. Braun, T. Kratzmüller, E. Meyer, “Patterning polymers by micro-fluid-contact printing.” Advanced Materials 13 (2001) 1312-1317.

43. W.S. Beh, I.T. Kim, D. Qin, Y. Xia, G.M. Whitesides, “Formation of patterned microstructures of conducting polymers by soft lithography, and applications in microelectronic device fabrication.” Advanced Materials 11 (1999) 1038-1041.

44. J.A. Rogers, Z. Boa, V.R. Raju, “Nonphotolithographic fabrication of organic transistors with micron feature sizes.” Applied Physics Letters 72 (1998) 2716-2718.

45. T. Granlund, T. Nyberg, L.S. Roman, M. Svensson, O. Inganäs, “Patterning of polymer light-emitting diodes by soft lithography.” Advanced Materials 12 (2000) 269-273.

46. B. Xu, F. Arias, S.T. Brittain, X.-M. Zhao, B. Grzybowski, S. Torquato, G.M. Whitesides, “Making negative Poisson’s ratio microstructures by soft lithography.” Advanced Materials 11 (1999) 1186-1189.

47. D. Gallego, N. Ferrell, D. Hanford, “Fabrication of Piezoelectric Polyvinylidene Fluoride (PVDF) Microstructures by Soft Lithography for Tissue Engineering and Cell Biology Applications.” in Printing Methods for Electronics, Photonics and Biomaterials, edited by G. Gigli (Mater. Res. Soc. Symp. Proc. Volume 1002E, Warrendale, PA, 2007) 1002-N04-05.

48. G. Vozzi, C. Flaim, A. Ahluwalia, S. Bhatia, “Fabrication of PLGA scaffolds using soft lithography and microsyringe deposition.” Biomaterials 24 (2003), 2533-2540.

261

Page 283: Polymer MEMS

49. D. Gallego, N. Ferrell, Y. Sun, D.J. Hansford, “Multilayer micromolding of degradable polymer tissue engineering scaffolds.” Materials Science and Engineering C (in press).

50. J. Guan, H. He, D.J. Hansford, L.J. Lee, “Self-folding of three-dimensional hydrogel microstructures.” The Journal of Physical Chemistry B 109 (2005) 23134-23137.

51. G. Genolet, J. Brugger, M. Despont, U. Drechsler, P. Vettiger, N.F. de Rooij, D. Anselmetti, “Soft, entirely photoplastic probes for scanning force microscopy.” Review of Scientific Instruments 70 (1999) 2398-2401.

52. X. Wang, J. Engel, C. Liu, “Liquid crystal polymer (LCP) for MEMS: processes and applications.” Journal of Micromechanics and Microengineering 13 (2003) 628-633.

53. G. Witzgall, R. Vrijen, E. Yablonovitch, V. Doan, B.J. Schwartz, “Single-shot two-photon exposure of commercial photoresist for the production of three-dimensional structures.” Optics Letters 23 (1998) 1745-1747.

54. T. Baldacchini, C.N. LaFratta, R.A. Farrer, “Acrylic-based resin with favorable properties for three-dimensional two-photon polymerization.” Journal of Applied Physics 95 (2004) 6072-6076.

55. A. Bertsch, H. Lorenz, P. Renaud, “3D microfabrication by combining microstereolithography and thick resist UV lithography.” Sensors and Actuators A 73 (1999) 14-23.

56. H. Sirringhaus, T. Kawase, R.H. Friend, T. Shimoda, M. Inbasekaran, W. Wu, E.P. Woo, “High-resolution inkjet printing of all-polymer transistor circuits.” Science 290 (2000) 2123-2126.

57. X.-M. Zhao, S.P. Smith, S.J. Waldman, G.M. Whitesides, M. Prentiss, “Demonstration of waveguide couplers fabricated using microtrasnfer molding.” Applied Physics Letters 71 (1997) 1017-1019.

58. C. Liu, “Recent developments in polymer MEMS.” Advanced Materials 19 (2007) 3783-3790.

59. J. Engel, J. Chen, Z. Fan, C. Liu, “Polymer micromachined multimodal tactile sensors.” Sensors and Actuators A 117 (2005) 50-61.

60. G. Guan, N. Ferrell, L.J. Lee, D.J. Hansford, “Fabrication of polymeric microparticles for drug delivery by soft lithography.” Biomaterials 27 (2006) 4034-4041.

262

Page 284: Polymer MEMS

61. S.L. Tao, T.A. Desai, “Microfabrication of multilayer, asymmetric, polymeric devices for drug delivery.” Advanced Materials 17 (2005) 1625-1630.

62. N. Chronis, L.P. Lee, “Electrothermally activated SU-8 microgripper for single cell manipulation in solution.” Journal of Microelectromechanical Systems 14 (2005) 857-863.

63. M. Ferrari, A. Lee, L.J. Lee (eds.), Biological and Biomedical Nanotechnology, Springer, Boston, MA (2006).

64. A.C. Richards Grayson, I.S. Choi, B.M. Tyler, P.P. Wang, H. Brem, M.J. Cima, R. Langer, “Multi-pulse drug delivery from a resorbable polymeric microchip device.” Nature Materials 2 (2003) 767-772.

65. A. Chakrapani, “Processing and characterization of polymer microparticles for controlled drug delivery systems.” Ph.D. Thesis, Ohio State University (2007).

66. S.N. Bhatia, C.S. Chen, “Tissue engineering at the microscale.” Biomedical Microdevices 2 (1999) 131-144.

67. Y. Yang, S. Basu, D.L. Tomasko, L. James Lee, S.-T. Yang, “Fabrication of well-defined PLGA scaffolds using microembossing and carbon dioxide bonding.” Biomaterials 26 (2005) 2585-2594.

68. A.W. Orr, B.P. Helmke, B.R. Blackman, M.A. Schwartz, “Mechanisms of mechanotransduction.” Developmental Cell 10 (2006) 11-20.

69. M.R.K. Mofrad, R.D. Kamm (eds.), Cytoskeletal Mechanics, Cambridge University Press, Cambridge (2006).

70. A. Nicolas, B. Geiger, S.A. Safran, “Cell mechanosensitivity control the anisotropy of focal adhesions.” Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences USA 101 (2004) 12520-12525.

71. M.P. Sheetz, D.P. Felsenfeld, C.G. Galbraith, “Cell migration: regulation of force on extracellular matrix-integrin complexes.” Trends in Cell Biology 8 (1998) 51-54.

72. M.E. Chicurel, C.S. Chen, D.E. Ingber, “Cellular control lies in the balance of forces.” Current Opinions in Cell Biology 10 (1998) 232-239.

73. C.G. Galbraith, M.P. Sheetz, “Forces on adhesive contacts affect cell function.” Current Opinions in Cell Biology 10 (1998) 566-571.

74. N. Wang, J.T. Butler, D.E. Ingber, “Mechanotransduction across the cell surface and through the cytoskeleton.” Science 260 (1993) 1124-1127.

263

Page 285: Polymer MEMS

75. C.S. Chen, M. Mrksich, S. Huang, G.M. Whitesides, D.E. Ingber, “Geometric control of cell life and death.” Science 276 (1997) 1425-1428.

76. M. Chrzanowska-Wodnicke, K. Burridge, “Rho-stimulated contractility drive the formation of stress fibers and focal adhesions.” Journal of Cell Biology 133 (1996) 1403-1415.

77. D.E. Ingber, “Cellular tensegrity revisited I: Cell structure and hierarchical systems biology.” Journal of Cell Science 116 (2003) 1157-1173.

78. D.E. Ingber, “Tensiegrity II. How structural networks influence cellular information processing networks.” Journal of Cell Science 116 (2003) 1397-1408.

79. G. Bao, S. Suresh, “Cell and molecular mechanics of biological materials.” Nature Materials 2 (2003) 715-725.

80. A.E. Cress, R.B. Nagle (eds.), Cell Adhesion and Cytoskeletal Molecules in Metastasis, Springer, Dordrecht, The Netherlands (2006).

81. H. Yamaguchi, J. Condeelis, “Regulation of the actin cytoskeleton in cancer cell migration and invasion.” Biochimica et Beophysica Acta 1773 (2007) 642-652.

82. F.C.S. Ramaekers, F.T. Bosman, “The cytoskeleton and disease.” Journal of Pathology 204 (2004) 351-354.

83. E.B. Lane, W.H.I. McLean, “Keratins and skin disorders.” Journal of Pathology 204 (2004) 355-366.

84. E. Fuchs, “The cytoskeleton and disease: genetic disorder of intermediate filaments.” Annual Review of Genetics 30 (1996) 197-231.

85. K. Zatloukal, C. Stumptner, A. Fuchsbichler, P. Fickert, C. Lackner, M. Trauner, H. Denk, “The keratin cytoskeleton in liver disease.” Journal of Pathology 204 (2004) 367-376.

86. D.W. Owens. E.B. Lane, “Keratin mutations and intestinal pathology.” Journal of Pathology204 (2004) 377-385.

87. Y. Calle, H.-C. Chou, A.J. Thrasher, G.E. Jones. “Wiskott-Aldrich syndrome protein and the cytoskeletal dynamics of dendritic cells.” Journal of Pathology 204 (2004) 460-469.

88. P.B. Schiff, S.B. Horwitz, “Taxol stabilizes microtubules in mouse fibroblast cells.” Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences USA 77 (1980) 1561-1565.

264

Page 286: Polymer MEMS

89. M.V. Blagosklonny, T. Fojo, “Molecular effect of Paclitaxel: myths and reality.” International Journal of Cancer 83 (1999) 151-156.

90. V.K. Ngan, K. Bellman, B.T. Hill, L. Wilson, M.A. Jordan, “Mechanism of mitotic block and inhibition of cell proliferation by the semisynthetic vinca alkaloids vinorelbine and its newer derivative vinflunine.” Molecular Pharmacology 60 (2001) 225-232.

91. G.G. Borisy, E.W. Taylor, “The mechanism of action of colchicines.” The Journal of Cell Biology 34 (1967) 525-533.

92. K.L.K. Duncan, M.D. Duncan, M.C. Ally, E.A. Sausville, “Cucurbitacin E-induced disruption of the actin and vimentin cytoskeleton in prostate carcinoma cells.” Biochemical Pharmacology 52 (1996) 1553-1560.

93. J.A. Cooper, “Effects of cytochalasin and phalloidin on actin.” The Journal of Cell Biology 105 (1987) 1473-1478.

94. M.R. Bubb, A.M.J. Senderowiczf, E.A. Sausville, K.L.K. Duncan, E.D. Kern, “Jasplakinolide, a cytotoxic natural product, induces actin polymerization and competitively inhibits the binding of phalloidin to F-actin.” The Journal of Biological Chemistry 269 (1994) 14869-14871.

95. M.R. Bubb, I. Spector, B.B. Beyer, K.M. Fosen, “Effects of Jasplakinolide on the kinetics of actin polymerization.” The Journal of Biological Chemistry 275 (2000) 5163-5170.

96. T. Ohashi, M. Sato, “Remodeling of vascular endothelial cells exposed to fluid shear stress: experimental and numerical approach.” Fluid Dynamics Research 37 (2005) 40-59.

97. O. Traub, B.C. Berk, “Laminar shear stress: mechanicsms by which endothelial cells transduce an atheroprotective force.” Arteriosclerosis, Thrombosis, and Vascular Biology 18 (1998) 677-685.

98. C.R. White, J.A. Frangos, “The shear stress of it all: the cell membrane and mechanochemical tranduction.” Philosophical Transactions of the Royal Society B 362 (2007) 1459-1467.

99. K.J. Van Vliet, G. Bao, S. Suresh, “The biomechanics toolbox: experimental approaches for living cells and biomolecules.” Acta Materialia 51 (2003) 5881-5905.

100. T.D. Brown, “Techniques for mechanical stimulation of cell in vitro: a review.” Journal of Biomechanics 33 (2000) 3-14.

265

Page 287: Polymer MEMS

101. T.G. Kuznetsova, M.N. Starodubtseva, N.I. Yegorenkov, S.A. Chizhik, R.I. Zhdanov. “Atomic force microscopy probing of cell elasticity.” Micron 38 (2007) 824-833.

102. C. Rotsch, M. Radmacher, “Drug-induced changes of cytoskeletal structure and mechanics in fibroblasts: an atomic force microscopy study.” Biophysical Journal 78 (2000) 520-535.

103. R.M. Hochmuth, “Micropipette aspiration of living cells.” Journal of Biomechanics 33 (2000) 15-22.

104. M. Dao, C.T. Lim, S. Suresh, “Mechanics of the human red blood cell deformed by optical tweezers.” Journal of the Mechanics and Physics of Solids 51 (2003) 2259-2280.

105. A.D. Mehta, M. Rief, J.A. Spudich, D.A. Smith, R.M. Simmons, “Single-molecule biomechanics with optical methods.” Science 283 (1999) 1689-1695.

106. A.K. Harris, P. Wild, D. Stopak, “Silicone rubber substrata: a new wrinkle in the study of cell locomotion.” Science 208 (1980) 177-179.

107. M. Dembo, Y.-L. Wang, “Stresses at the cell-to-substrate interface during locomotion of fibroblasts.” Biophysical Journal 76 (1999) 2307-2316.

108. S. Munevar, Y.-L Wang, M. Dembo, “Traction force microscopy of migrating normal and H-ras transformed 3T3 fibroblasts.” Biophysical Journal 80 (2001), 1744-1757.

109. R.J. Pelham, Y.-L. Wang, “Cell locomotion and focal adhesions are regulated by substrate flexibility.” Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences USA 94 (1997) 13661-13665.

110. C.-M. Lo, H.-B. Wang, M. Dembo, Y.-L. Wang, “Cell movement is guided by the rigidity of the substrate.” Biophysical Journal 79 (2000) 144-152.

111. G. Lin, K.SJ. Pister, K.P. Roos, “Surface micromachined polysilicon heart cell force transducer.” Journal of Microelectromechanical Systems 9 (2000) 9-17.

112. C.B. Galbraith, M.P. Sheetz, “A micromachined device provides a new bend on fibroblast traction forces.” Proceeding of the National Academy of Sciences USA 94 (1997) 9114-9118.

113. J.L. Tan, J. Tien, D.M. Pirone, D.S. Gray, K. Bhadriraju, C.S. Chen, “Cells lying on a bed of microneedles: An approach to isolate mechanical force.” Proceeding of the National Academy of Sciences USA 100 (1993), 1484-1489.

266

Page 288: Polymer MEMS

114. R. Günter, “Dewetting of thin polymer films.” Physical Review Letters 68 (1992) 75-78.

115. R. Xie, A. Karim, J.F. Douglas, C.C. Han, R.A. Weiss, “Spinodal dewetting of thin polymer films.” Physical Review Letters 81 (1998) 1251-1254.

116. A. Sehgal, V. Ferreiro, J.F. Douglas, E.J. Amis, A. Karim, “Pattern-directed dewetting of ultrathin polymer films.” Langmuir 18 (2002) 7041-7048.

117. E. Meyer, H. Braun, “Controlled dewetting processes on microstructured surfaces- a new procedure for thin film microstructuring.” Macromolecular Materials and Engineering 276/277 (2000) 44-50.

118. Z. Zhang, Z. Wang, R. Xing, Y. Han, “How to form regular polymer microstructures by surface-patterned-directed dewetting.” Surface Science 539 (2003) 129-136.

119. Z. Zhang, Z. Wang, R. Xing, Y. Han, “Patterning thin polymer films by surface-directed dewetting and pattern transfer.” Polymer 44 (2003) 3737-3743.

120. P. Lenz, R. Lipowsky, “Morphological transitions of wetting layers on structured surfaces.” Physical Review Letters 80 (1998) 1920-1923.

121. R. Konnur, K. Kargupta, A. Sharma, “Instability and morphology of thin liquid films on chemically heterogeneous substrates.” Physical Review Letters 84 (2000) 931-934.

122. K. Kargupta, A. Sharma, “Dewetting of thin films on periodic physically and chemically patterned surfaces.” Langmuir 18 (2002) 1893-1903.

123. L.-R. Bao, L. Tan, X.D. Huang, Y.P. Kong, L.J. Guo, S.W. Pang, A.F. Yee, “Polymer inking as a micro- and nanopatterning technique.” Journal of Vacuum Science and Technology B 21 (2003) 2749-2754.

124. J. Guan, A. Chakrapani, D.J. Hansford, “Polymer microparticles fabricated by soft lithography.” Chemistry of Materials 17 (2005) 6227-6229.

125. M. Gerard, A. Chaubey, B.D. Malhotra, “Application of conducting polymers to biosensors.” Biosensors and Bioelectronics 17 (2002) 345-359.

126. S. Geetha, C.R.K. Rao, M. Vijayan, D.C. Trivedi, “Biosensing and drug delivery by polypyrrole.” Analytica Chimica Acta 568 (2006) 119-125.

127. L. Dai, B. Winkler, L. Dong, L. Tong, A.W.H. Mau, “Conjugated polymers for light-emitting applications.” Advanced Materials 13 (2001) 915-925.

267

Page 289: Polymer MEMS

128. D. Braun, “Semiconducting polymer LEDs.” Materials Today 5(6) (2002) 32-39.

129. C.J. Drury, C.M.J. Mutsaers, C.M. Hart, M. Matters, D.M. de Leeuw, “Low-cost all-polymer integrated circuits.” Applied Physics Letters 73 (1998) 108-110.

130. N. Stutzmann, R.H. Friend, H. Sirringhaus, “Self-aligned, vertical-channel, polymer field-effect transistors.” Science 299 (2003) 1881-1884.

131. E.W.H. Jager, E. Smela, O. Inganäs, “Microfabricated conjugated polymer actuators.” Science 290 (2000) 1540-1545.

132. E. Smela, “Microfabrication of PPy microactuators and other conjugated polymer devices.” Journal of Micromechanics and Microengineering 9 (1999) 1-18.

133. X.L. Wei, Y.Z. Wang, S.M. Long, C. Bobeczko, A.J. Epstein, “Synthesis and physical properties of highly sulfonated polyaniline.” Journal of the American Chemical Society 118 (1996) 2545-2555.

134. J. Yue, Z.H. Wang, K.R. Cromack, A.J. Epstein A.G. MacDiarmid, “Effect of sulfonic acid group on polyaniline backbone.” Journal of the American Chemical Society. 113 (1991) 2665-2671.

135. J. Stejskal, I. Sapurina, J. Prokeš, J. Zemek, “In-situ polymerized polyaniline films.” Synthetic Metals 105 (1999) 195-202.

136. I. Sapurina, A. Riede, J. Stejskal, “In-situ polymerized polyaniline films 3. Film formation.” Synthetic Metals 123 (2001) 503-507.

137. S. Holdcroft, “Patterning π-conjugated polymers.” Advanced Materials 13 (2001) 1753-1765.

138. D.G. Lidzey, M.A. Pate, M.S. Weaver, T.A. Fisher, D.D.C. Bradley, “Photoprocessed and micropatterned conjugated polymer LEDs.” Synthetic Metals 82 (1996) 141-148.

139. F.J. Touwslager, N.P. Willard, D.M. de Leeuw, “I-line lithography of poly-(3,4-ethylenedioxythiophene) electrodes and application in all-polymer integrated circuits.” Applied Physics Letters 81 (2002) 4556-4558.

140. I. Mav, M. Žigon, A. Šebenik, “Sulfonated polyaniline.” Synthetic Metals 101 (1999) 717-718.

141. I. Mav, M. Žigon, A. Šebenik, J. Vohlidal, “Sulfonated polyanilines prepared by copolymerization of 3-aminobenzenesulfonic acid and aniline: the effect of

268

Page 290: Polymer MEMS

reaction conditions on polymer properties.” Journal of Polymer Science A 38 (2000) 3390-3398.

142. Y. Huang, B. Rubinsky, “Microfabricated electroporation chip for singe cell membrane permeabilization.” Sensors and Actuators A 89 (2001) 242-249.

143. M. Khine, A. Lau, C. Ionescu-Zanetti, J. Seo, L.P. Lee, “A single cell electroporation chip.” Lab on a Chip 5 (2005) 38-43.

144. K.G. Klemic, J.F. Klemic, M.A. Reed, F.J. Sigworth, “Micromolded PDMS planar electrode allows patch clamp electrical recordings from cells.” Biosensors and Bioelectronics 17 (2002) 597-604.

145. X. Li, K.G. Klemic, M.A. Reed, F.J. Sigworth, “Microfluidic system for planar patch clamp electrode arrays.” Nano Letters 6 (2006) 815-819.

146. P. Wang, G. Xu, L. Qui, Y. Xu, Y. Li, R. Li, “Cell-based biosensors and its application in biomedicine.” Sensors and Actuators B 108 (2005) 567-584.

147. M. Nishizawa, K. Takoh, T. Matsue, “Micropatterning of HeLa cells on glass substates and evaluation of respiratory activity using microelectrodes.” Langmuir 18 (2002) 3645-3649.

148. C.S. Chen, M. Mrksich, S. Huang, G.M. Whitesides, D.E. Ingber, “Micropatterned surface for control of cell shape, position, and function.” Biotechnology Progress 14 (1998) 356-363.

149. Y. Ito, “Surface micropatterning to regulate cell function.” Biomaterials 20 (1999) 2333-2342.

150. A. Brock, D. Chang, C. Ho, P. LeDuc, X. Jiang, G.M. Whitesides, D.E. Ingber, “Geometric determinant of directional cell motility revealed using microcontact printing.” Langmuir 19 (2003) 1611-1617.

151. M. Khalil, A. Shariat-Panahi, R. Tootle, T. Ryder, P. McCloskey, E. Roberts, H. Hodgson, C. Selden, “Human hepatocyte cell lines proliferating as cohesive spheroid colonies in alginate markedly upregulate both synthetic and detoxificatory liver function.” Journal of Hepatology 297 (2001) 68-77.

152. R. Clicklis, J.C. Merchuk, S. Cohen, Modeling mass trasfer in hepatocyte spheroids via cell viability, spheroid size and hepatocellular funtion.” Biotechnology and Bioengineering 86 (2004) 672-680.

153. S.M. Dang, M. Kyba, R. Perlingeiro, G.Q. Daley, P.W. Zandstra, “Efficiency of embryoid body formation and hematopoietic development from embryonic stem cells in different culture systems.” Biotechnology and Bioengineering 78 (2002) 442-453.

269

Page 291: Polymer MEMS

154. M. Mrksich, L.E. Dike, J. Tien, D.E. Ingber, G.M. Whitesides, “Using microcontact printing to pattern the attachment of mammalian cells to self-assembled monolayers of alkanethiolates on transparent films of gold and silver.” Experimental Cell Research 235 (1997) 305-313.

155. H. Kaji, K. Takoh, M. Nishizawa, T. Matsue, “Intracellular Ca2+ imaging for micropatterned cardiac myocytes.” Biotechnology and Bioengineering 81 (2003) 748-751.

156. K.Y. Suh, J. Seong, A. Khademhosseini, P.E. Laibinis, R. Langer, “A simple soft lithographic route to fabrication of poly(ethylene glycol) microstructures for protein and cell patterning.” Biomaterials 25 (2004) 557-563.

157. M.R. Dusseiller, D. Schlaepfer, M. Koch, R. Kroschewski, M. Textor, “An inverted microcontact printing method on topographically structured polystyrene chips for arrayed micro-3-D culturing of single cells.” Biomaterials 26 (2005) 5917-5925.

158. E.W.H. Jager, C. Immerstrand, K.H. Peterson, K. Magnusson, I. Lundström, O. Inganäs, “The cell clinic: closable microvials for single cell studies.” Biomedical Microdevices 4 (2002) 177-187.

159. A. Folch, B. Jo, O. Hurtado, D.J. Beebe, M. Toner, “Microfabricated elastomeric stencils for micropatterning cell cultures.” Journal of Biomedical Materials Research 52 (2000) 346-353.

160. M.J. Rosenbluth, W.A. Lam, D.A. Fletcher, “Force microscopy of nonadherent cells: a comparison of leukemia cell deformability.” Biophysical Journal 90 (2006) 2994-3003.

161. J. Fukuda, K. Nakazawa, “Orderly arrangement of hepatocytes spheroids on a microfabricated chip.” Tissue Engineering 11 (2005) 1254-1262.

162. N. Ferrell, D. Hansford, “Fabrication of micro- and nanoscale polymer structures by soft lithography and spin dewetting.” Macromolecular Rapid Communications 28 (2007) 964-967.

163. F. Braet, R. De Zanger, E. Wisse. Drying cells for SEM, AFM and TEM by hexamethyldisilazane: a study on hepatic endothelial cells. Journal of Microscopy 186 (1997) 84-87.

164. B.D. Ratner, A.S. Hoffman, F.J. Schoen, and J.E. Lemons, Biomaterials Science An Intoduction to Materials in Medicine, Elsevier Academic Press, San Diego, CA (2004) p. 67.

270

Page 292: Polymer MEMS

165. H. Becker and U. Heim, “Hot embossing as a method for the fabrication of polymer high aspect ratio structures.” Sensors and Actuators A 83 (2000) 130-135.

166. L.J. Lee, M.J. Madou, K.W. Koelling, S. Daunert, S. Lai, and C.G. Koh, “Design and fabrication of CD-like microfluidic platforms for diagnostics: polymer-based microfabrication.” Biomedical Microdevices 3 (2001) 339-351.

167. B. Ziaie, A. Baldi, M. Lei, Y. Gu, and R.A. Siegel, “Hard and soft micromachining for BioMEMS: a review of techniques.” Advanced Drug Delivery Reviews 56 (2004) 145-172.

168. G. Wei, B. Bhushan, N. Ferrell, D. Hansford, “Microfabrication and nanomechanical characterization of polymer microelectromechanical systems for biological applications.” Journal of Vacuum Science and Technology A 23 (2005) 811-819.

169. K.E. Peterson, “Silicon as a mechanical material.” Proceedings of the IEEE 70 (1982) 420-457.

170. J.A. Forrest, D. Dalnoki-Veress, “The glass transition in thin polymer films.” Advances in Colloid and Interface Science 94 (2001) 167-196.

171. J.L. Keddie, R.A.L. Jones, R.A. Cory, “Size-dependent depression of the glass transition temperature in polymer films.” Europhysics Letters 27 (1994) 59-64.

172. B. Bhushan, A.V. Kulkarni, W. Bonin, J. Wyrobek, “Nano/picoindentation measurement using a capacitance transducer system in atomic force microscopy.” Philosophical Magazine A 74 (1996) 1117-1128.

173. S.J. Bull, “Nanoindentation of coating.” Journal of Physics D 38 (2005) R393-R413.

174. A.C. Fischer-Cripps, “Critical review of analysis and interpretation of nanoindentation test data.” Surface and Coatings Technology 200 (2006) 4153-4165.

175. X. Li, B. Bhushan, “A review of nanoindentation continuous stiffness measurement technique and it applications.” Materials Characterization 48 (2002) 11-36.

176. I.H. Loh, M.S. Sheu, A.B. Fishcer, Biocompatible polymer surfaces, in Desk Reference of Functional Polymers: Synthesis and Applications (edited by R. Arshady) American Chemical Society, Washington, D.C. (1997).

271

Page 293: Polymer MEMS

177. D.B. Holt, P.R. Gauger, A.W. Kusterbeck, F.S. Ligler, “Fabrication of a capillary immunosensor in polymethyl methacrylate.” Biosensors and Bioelectronics 17 (2002) 95-103.

178. A. van der Berg (ed.), Lab-on-a-chip Chemistry in Miniaturized Synthesis and Analysis Systems, Elsevier, Amsterdam (2003).

179. B. Ellis, Polymers: A Properties Database, Available on compact disk, CRC, Boca Raton, FL (2000).

180. J. Brandrup, E.H. Immergut, E.A. Grulke (eds.), Polymer Handbook, Wiley, New York, NY (1999).

181. J.E. Mark, Polymer Data Handbook, Oxford University Press, Oxford (1999).

182. T.G. van Kooten, H.T. Spijker, H.H. Busscher, “Plasma-treated polystyrene surfaces: model surface for studying cell-biomaterial interactions.” Biomaterials 25 (2004) 1735-1747.

183. M. Alexandre, P. Dubois, “Polymer-layered silicate nanocomposites: preparation, properties and uses of a new class of materials.” Materials Science and Engineering 28 (2000) 1-63.

184. S.S. Ray, M Okamoto, “Polymer/layered silicate nanocomposites: a review from preparation to processing.” Progress in Polymer Science 28 (2003) 1539-1641.

185. J. Njuguna, K. Pielichowski, “Polymer nanocomposites for aerospace applications: properties.” Advanced Engineering Materials 5 (2003) 769-778.

186. F. Gao, “Clay/polymer composites: the story.” Materials Today 7 (2004) 50-55.

187. G. Beyer, “Nanocomposites: a new class of flame retardants for polymers.” Plastic Additives and Composites 4 (2002) 22-28.

188. M. Kurian, M.E. Galvin, P.E.. Trapa, D.R. Sadoway, A.M. Mayes, “Single ion conducting polymer-silicate nanocomposite electrolytes for lithium battery applications.” Electrochimica Acta 50 (2005) 2125-2134.

189. R.Y. Lockhead, C.R. Haynes. S.R. Jones, V. Smith, “the high throughput investigation of polyphenolic coupler in biodegradable packaging materials.” Applied Surface Science 252 (2006) 2535-2548.

190. H. Liu, B. Bhushan, “Investigation of nanotribological properties of self-assembled monolayerss with alkyl and biphenyl spacer chains.” Ultramicroscopy 91 (2002) 185-202.

272

Page 294: Polymer MEMS

191. W.C. Oliver, G.M. Pharr, “An improved technique for determining hardness and elastic modulus using load and displacement sensing indentation experiments.” Journal of Materials Research 7 (1992) 1564-1583.

192. B. Bhushan, X. Li, “Nanomechanical characterization of solid surfaces and thin films.” International Materials Review 48 (2003) 125-164.

193. H. Liu, B. Bhushan, “Investigation of nanotribological properties of self-assembled monolayers with alkyl and biphenyl spacer chains.” Ultramicroscopy 91 (2002) 185-202.

194. W.C. Young, R.G. Budynas, Roark’s Formulas for Stress and Strain, Wiley, New York, NY (2002).

195. A. Yamamoto, S. Mishim, N. Maryuama, M. Sumita, “A new technique for direct measurement of the shear force necessary to detach a cell from a material.” Biomaterial 19 (1998) 871-879.

196. K.A. Athanasiou, B.S. Thoma, D.R. Lanctot, D. Shin, C.M. Agrawal, R.G. LeBaron, “Development of the cytodetachment technique to quantify mechanical adhesiveness of a single cell.” Biomaterial 20 (1999) 2405-2415.

197. D.A. Stenger, G.W. Gross, E.W. Keefer, K.M. Shaffer, J.D. Andreadis, W. Ma, J.J. Pancrazio, “Detection of Physiologically Active Compound Using Cell-based Biosensors.” Trends in Biotechnology 19 (2001) 304-309.

198. M.C. Beckerle, Cell Adhesion, Oxford University Press, Oxford (2001).

199. C.S. Chen, M. Mrksich, S. Huang, G.M. Whitesides, D.E. Ingber, “Geometic control of cell life and death.” Science 276 (1997) 1425-1428.

200. A.R. Horwitz, J.T. Parsons, “Cell migration—movin’ on.” Science 286 (1999) 1102-1103.

201. E. Crowley, A. Horwitz, “Tyrosine phosphorylation and cytoskeletal tension regulate the release of fibroblast adhesions.” Journal of Cell Biology 131 (1997) 525-537.

202. M. Chicurel, R. Singer, C. Meyer, D. Ingber, “Integrin binding and mechanical tension induce movement of mRNA and ribosomes to focal adhesions.” Nature 392 (1998) 730-733.

203. D. Paulin, A. Huet, L. Khanamyrian, Z. Xue, “Desminopothies in muscle disease.” Journal of Pathology 204 (2004) 418-427.

204. M. Pekny, M. Pekna, “Astrocyte intermediate filaments in CNS pathologies and regeneration.” Journal of Pathology 204 (2004) 428-437.

273

Page 295: Polymer MEMS

205. H. Yamaguchi, J. Condeelis, “Regulation of the actin cytoskeleton in cancer cell migration and invasion.” Biochimica et Biophysica Acta 1773 (2007) 642-652.

206. Z.Z. Wu, G. Zhang, M. Long, H.B. Wang, G.B. Song, S.X. Cai, “Comparison of the viscoelecastic properties of normal hepatocytes and hepatocellular carcinaoma cells under cytoskeletal perturbation.” Bioreology 37 (2000) 279-290.

207. M.J. Rosenbluth, W.A. Lam, D.A. Fletcher, “Force microscopy of nonadherent cells: a comparison of leukemia cell deformability.” Biophysical Journal 90 (2006) 2994-3003.

208. L.H. Miller, D.I. Baruch, K. Marsh, O.K. Doumbo, “The pathogenic basis of malaria.” Nature 415 (2002) 673-679.

209. G.D. Sempowski, M.A. Borrello, T.M. Blieden, K. Barth, R.P. Phipps, “Fibroblast heterogeneity in the healing wound.” Wound Repair and Regeneration 3 (1995) 120-131.

210. V.C. Sandulache, A. Parekh, H.-S. Li-Korotky, J.E. Dohar, P.A. Hebda, “Prostaglandin E2 differentially modulates human fetal and adult dermal fibroblast migration and contraction: implication for would healing.” Wound Repair and Regeneration 14 (2006) 633-643.

211. J.A. Cooper, “Effects of cytochalasin and phalliodin on actin.” The Journal of Cell Biology 105 (1987) 1473-1478.

212. M.R. Bubb, I. Spectro, B.B. Beyer, K.M. Fosen, “Effects of jasplakinolide on the kinetics of actin polymerization.” The Journal of Biological Chemistry 275 (2000) 5163-5170.

213. M. Knoblauch, G. A. Noll, T. Müller, D. Prüfer, I. Scheider-Hüther, A. J. E. van Bel, “ATP-independent contractile proteins from plants.” Nature Materials 2 (2003) 600-603.

214. M. Knoblauch, W. S. Peters, “Biomimetic actuators: where technology and cell biology meet.” Cell and Molecular Life Sciences 61 (2004) 2497-2509.

215. S. Schwan, M. Fritzsche, A. Cismak, A. Heilmann, U. Spohn, “In vitro investigation of the geometric contraction behavior of chemo-mechanical P-protein aggregates (forisomes). Biophysical Chemisty 125 (2007) 444-452.

216. S. Schwann (unpublished data).

274

Page 296: Polymer MEMS

275

217. M. Palacio, B. Bhushan, N. Ferrell. D. Hansford, “Nanomechanical characterization of polymer beam structures for BioMEMS applications.” Sensors and Actuators A 135 (2007) 637-650.

218. R. C. Hibbeler, Mechanics of Materials, Prentice Hall, New York, NY, 4th Edition (1997).

219. N. Ferrell, J. Woodard, D. Hansford, “Fabrication of polymer microstructures for MEMS: sacrificial layer micromolding and patterned substrate micromolding.” Biomedical Microdevices 9 (2007) 815-821.

220. M. Ilie, B. M„rculescu, N. Moldovan, N. Nastase, M. Olteanu, “Adhesion between PMMA mask layer and silicon wafer in KOH aqueous solution.” in Materials andDevice Characterization in Micromachining, edited by C. R. Friedrich and Y.Vladimirsky, (Proc. of SPIE 3512, Santa Clara, CA, 1998) pp. 422-430.

221. D. S. Bodas, S. K. Mahapatra, and S. A. Gangal, “Comparative study of spin coated and sputtered PMMA as an etch mask material for silicon micromachining.” Sensors and Actuators A 120 (2005) 582-588.

222. D. S. Bodas and S. A. Gangal, “Poly(methyl methacrylate) as masking material for microelectromechanical system (MEMS) fabrication.” Journal of Applied Polymer Science 102 (2006) 2094-2098.

223. J. Guan, N. Ferrell, B. Yu, D.J. Hansford, L.J. Lee, “Simultaneous fabrication of hybrid arrays of nanowires andmicro/nanoparticles by dewetting on micropillars.” Soft Matter 3 (2007) 1369-1371.

224. R.T. Butler, N.J. Ferrell, D.J. Hansford, “Spatial and geometrical control of silicification using a patterned poly-L-lysine template.” Applied Surface Science 252 (2006) 7337–7342.

225. H. Borteh, N. Ferrell, R. Butler, S. Olesik, D. Hansford, “Electroless Deposition of Gold Nanoparticles Over Silicon-based Substrates.” in Materials, Processes, Integration and Reliability in Advanced Interconnects for Micro- and Nanoelectronics, edited by Q. Lin, E. T. Ryan, W. Wu, D.Y. Yoon, (Mater. Res. Soc. Symp. Proc. 990, Warrendale, PA, 2007) 0990-B08-17.


Recommended